1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Note Note
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
504 Code box prevent that the term
505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
514 More about \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code is described in section
520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
522 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
526 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 is explained in section
532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
534 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
544 \begin_inset Index idx
547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
554 See section 5.1 of the
558 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
562 \begin_layout Chapter
563 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
567 \begin_layout Section
568 Basic File Operations
569 \begin_inset Index idx
572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
581 \begin_layout Standard
586 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
587 in addition to some more advanced operations:
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
628 arg "buffer-new-template"
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Standard
749 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
750 a few minor differences.
753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
764 command lists the available templates.
765 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
766 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
767 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
775 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
782 \begin_layout Standard
783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
815 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
816 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
817 is just that — a big, blank space.
825 \begin_layout Standard
846 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
851 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
854 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
872 will reload the document from disk.
873 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
874 and want to restore it to the last save.
883 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
884 them as your changes.
887 \begin_layout Section
888 Basic Editing Features
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
901 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
908 \begin_layout Standard
909 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
910 can perform cut and paste operations
911 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
912 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
913 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
914 editing features and how to access
916 We will start with cut and paste.
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 As you might expect, the
924 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
925 various other editing features.
926 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_layout Itemize
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_layout Itemize
1054 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_layout Itemize
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1068 \begin_inset space ~
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 \begin_inset Index idx
1089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1104 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1114 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1120 \begin_layout Standard
1121 The first three are self-explanatory.
1122 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1123 and other programs by
1144 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1145 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1150 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1151 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1152 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1153 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1154 into individual cells.
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1164 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1168 \begin_layout Standard
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1177 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1179 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1194 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1195 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1196 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space \space{}
1205 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1206 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1231 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1232 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1234 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1238 \begin_inset space ~
1243 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1244 start a new paragraph.
1245 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1246 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1254 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1271 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1274 paste from the primary selection.
1275 This is normally the currently selected text.
1278 \begin_layout Standard
1281 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1311 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 button to skip the current word.
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1337 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1346 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1348 If the toggle is set, searching for
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1360 will not match the word
1361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1375 Match whole words only
1377 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1378 to only find complete words, e.
1379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 offers also an advanced
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1420 feature that is described in sec.
1421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1427 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1436 \begin_inset space \space{}
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1450 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1455 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1462 \begin_layout Standard
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1470 When the cursor is inside an inset
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 selects the content of the inset.
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1488 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1491 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1495 \begin_layout Section
1497 \begin_inset Index idx
1500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1507 \begin_inset Index idx
1510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1519 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1529 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1535 or the toolbar button
1541 to undo some mistake.
1542 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1547 or the toolbar button
1554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1565 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1578 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1579 This is a consequence of the 100
1580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1583 step undo limit mentioned above.
1586 \begin_layout Standard
1595 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1597 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1601 \begin_layout Section
1603 \begin_inset Index idx
1606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1616 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1619 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 \begin_layout Itemize
1629 once anywhere in the edit window.
1630 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1634 \begin_layout Enumerate
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1646 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1652 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1653 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 \begin_layout Enumerate
1668 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1672 \begin_layout Standard
1673 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1674 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1678 \begin_layout Section
1680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1682 name "sec:Navigating"
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1699 \begin_layout Standard
1701 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1704 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1710 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1713 \begin_layout Itemize
1714 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_inset space ~
1723 or by the toolbar button
1726 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1732 \begin_layout Itemize
1733 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1738 and use the same menu to return to them.
1739 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1746 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1751 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1752 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1754 \begin_inset space ~
1759 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1760 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1761 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1762 your last editing position.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1770 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1774 \begin_layout Subsection
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1778 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1785 \begin_layout Standard
1786 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1787 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1788 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1796 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1800 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1812 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1818 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1819 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1820 dialog and to modify the citation.
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1824 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1826 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1827 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1835 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1840 you further to control the display.
1845 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1846 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1852 option keeps it in the current view state.
1853 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1861 3, the subsections of sections
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1865 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1870 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1885 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1895 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1896 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1910 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1911 So, for example, you can move section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1916 \begin_inset space ~
1919 2.4 or after section
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1938 (or the corresponding key bindings
1946 ) you can change the level of sections.
1947 So you can for example make section
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \begin_inset space ~
1962 \begin_layout Section
1963 Input/Word Completion
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1966 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1971 \begin_inset Index idx
1974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_inset Index idx
1984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2017 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2019 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2020 is used to propose completions.
2023 \begin_layout Standard
2024 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2027 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2048 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2052 \begin_inset space ~
2057 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2058 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2068 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2069 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2070 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2071 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2076 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2077 completions available.
2082 key to accept a proposed completion.
2083 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2084 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2085 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2093 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2094 ing options for text.
2095 The special math option
2099 enables characters to be composed.
2100 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2101 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2104 , you can then input the characters
2105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 to a formula to get it.
2117 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2118 of the math toolbar.
2119 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2123 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2124 's installation folder.
2125 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2134 \begin_layout Section
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_inset Index idx
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2230 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2234 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2241 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2260 \begin_inset space ~
2281 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2285 \begin_layout Labeling
2286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2290 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2291 LatexCommand nomenclature
2293 description "Tabulator key"
2299 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2301 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2315 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2319 , especially section
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "subsec:Lists"
2332 If you are still confused, look in the
2337 \begin_inset Newline newline
2345 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2346 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2350 \begin_layout Labeling
2351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2356 LatexCommand nomenclature
2358 description "Escape key"
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2372 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2373 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2387 \begin_inset space ~
2394 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2395 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2399 \begin_layout Standard
2400 There are three modifier keys:
2403 \begin_layout Labeling
2404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2423 LatexCommand nomenclature
2425 description "Control key"
2429 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2430 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2434 \begin_layout Itemize
2443 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2446 \begin_layout Itemize
2455 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2458 \begin_layout Itemize
2467 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2471 \begin_layout Labeling
2472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2491 LatexCommand nomenclature
2493 description "Shift key"
2497 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2498 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2501 \begin_layout Labeling
2502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Alt or Meta key"
2527 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2528 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2529 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2535 \begin_inset Newline newline
2538 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2540 menu accelerator keys
2543 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2544 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2549 For example, the sequence
2550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2560 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset space ~
2599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 \begin_layout Standard
2614 manual lists all other things bound to the
2622 \begin_layout Standard
2623 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2625 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2626 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2627 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2628 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2629 The \SpecialChar LyX
2630 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2631 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2632 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2634 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2650 followed by a capital
2657 \begin_layout Chapter
2660 \begin_inset Index idx
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 \begin_layout Section
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2691 \begin_layout Standard
2692 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2693 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2694 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2695 numbering schemes, and so on.
2696 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2697 and format the title of your document differently.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2705 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2706 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2707 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2708 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2709 picks one for you by default.
2710 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2713 \begin_layout Subsection
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2727 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 You can select a class using the
2737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2742 \begin_inset Index idx
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2752 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2761 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Article for basic articles
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Report for basic reports
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Book for writing a book
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 Letter for US-style letters
2782 \begin_layout Standard
2783 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2784 only uses if you have installed
2785 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2786 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2787 distributions will include
2789 Here are some of the classes.
2790 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2792 Special Document Classes
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2817 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2818 There are three article layouts available.
2819 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2820 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2821 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2822 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 sequential numbering
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2832 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2833 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2834 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Beamer Layout for presentations
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2843 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2844 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2845 with \SpecialChar LyX
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2853 \begin_layout Description
2855 \begin_inset space ~
2858 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 Foils Used to make transparencies
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2871 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2872 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2873 with \SpecialChar LyX
2877 \begin_layout Description
2878 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2879 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2890 \begin_layout Description
2891 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2892 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2893 (Is used by this document.)
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2900 \begin_layout Description
2901 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2904 \begin_layout Description
2909 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2910 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2912 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Slides Used to make transparencies
2920 \begin_layout Description
2922 \begin_inset space ~
2925 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2926 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2936 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2942 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2943 of the document classes.
2946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2956 \begin_inset Index idx
2959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2977 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2979 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2985 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2990 , are highly specialized.
2992 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2993 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2994 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2995 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2996 by some document class.
2997 There are just too many of them.
2998 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3010 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3011 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3012 document class for a new file.
3014 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3019 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 manual for information on how to install them.
3029 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3035 \begin_layout Standard
3036 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3037 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3038 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3039 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 class files to be used for dissertation
3041 s submitted to those universities.
3042 The \SpecialChar LyX
3043 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3045 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3049 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3055 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3062 name "subsec:Modules"
3067 \begin_inset Index idx
3070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3081 chosen document class.
3082 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3083 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3094 \begin_inset Index idx
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3110 packages or file format converters that are not always
3111 installed by default.
3113 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3114 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3115 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3116 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3118 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3119 file without the missing prerequisites.
3120 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3121 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3132 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3163 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3165 will advise you about these things.
3173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3177 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3182 \begin_inset Index idx
3185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 Document ! Local Layout
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3196 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 : They are intended to be used in
3198 a variety of different documents.
3199 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3200 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3201 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3202 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3203 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3205 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3223 manual for information on how to use it.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_layout Standard
3231 Each class has a default set of options.
3232 Here's a quick table describing them:
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3244 \begin_inset Tabular
3245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3712 \begin_layout Standard
3713 You're probably also wondering what
3714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3718 \begin_inset space ~
3722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3726 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3727 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3732 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3737 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3747 headings, there are also
3755 headings, and so on.
3756 We will describe these headings fully in section
3757 \begin_inset space ~
3761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3763 reference "subsec:Headings"
3770 \begin_layout Subsection
3772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3774 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3779 \begin_inset Index idx
3782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 \begin_inset Index idx
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 \begin_layout Standard
3802 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3824 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3826 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3827 doesn't support special options you want to
3828 use for your document.
3829 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3830 -class and its options, you have to read
3834 \begin_layout Standard
3838 \begin_inset space ~
3845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3851 \begin_inset space ~
3856 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3857 You can choose between the following five options:
3860 \begin_layout Labeling
3861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3866 Use default page style of current class.
3869 \begin_layout Labeling
3870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3875 No page numbers or headings.
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3894 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3895 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3896 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3899 \begin_layout Labeling
3900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3906 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3912 \begin_inset Index idx
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 -packages ! fancyhdr
3923 How they are defined is explained in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3939 \begin_inset space ~
3943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3945 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3952 \begin_layout Subsection
3953 Paper Size and Orientation
3954 \begin_inset Index idx
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 Document ! Paper size
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3966 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 You can find the following options in the menu
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset Index idx
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4010 What size paper to print on.
4015 \begin_layout Itemize
4021 \begin_layout Itemize
4027 \begin_layout Itemize
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4042 US letter, US legal, US executive
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 To choose whether to output as
4075 \begin_layout Labeling
4076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4085 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4086 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4093 name "subsec:Margins"
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 \begin_layout Standard
4121 Paper margins are set in the menu
4123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4140 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4141 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4142 the paper format and the font size into account.
4145 \begin_layout Subsection
4149 \begin_layout Standard
4150 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4156 That includes the paragraph environments.
4157 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4158 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4159 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4161 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4170 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4172 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4173 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4174 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4177 \begin_layout Section
4178 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4179 \begin_inset Index idx
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 Paragraph ! Indentation
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4202 \begin_layout Standard
4203 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4204 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4207 \begin_layout Standard
4208 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4209 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4210 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4211 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4215 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4221 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4222 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4223 language than English.
4225 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4228 \begin_layout Standard
4229 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4230 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4231 into \SpecialChar LyX
4233 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4236 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4238 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4239 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4240 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4248 goes to produce a printable file.
4253 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4255 gives you the ability globally to change
4259 these pre-coded spacings.
4260 We will explain more later.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paragraph Separation
4265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4267 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 Paragraph ! Separation
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4311 \begin_inset Index idx
4314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4323 \begin_layout Subsection
4327 \begin_layout Standard
4328 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 dialog and toggle the
4341 \begin_inset space ~
4346 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4349 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4353 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4354 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4360 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4363 \begin_layout Subsection
4365 \begin_inset Index idx
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4377 \begin_layout Standard
4380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4384 \begin_inset Index idx
4387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4396 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4400 \begin_inset space ~
4409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 -packages ! setspace
4426 installed to use this feature.
4431 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset space ~
4440 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4441 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4444 \begin_layout Section
4445 Paragraph Environments
4446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4448 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4453 \begin_inset Index idx
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Paragraph ! Environments
4463 \begin_inset Index idx
4466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4467 Paragraph environments|(
4475 \begin_layout Subsection
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4483 \begin_layout Standard
4502 \begin_inset Newline newline
4505 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4507 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4508 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4509 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4518 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 A paragraph environment is simply a
4523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4530 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4531 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4532 scheme, labels, and so on.
4533 Additionally, you can
4534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4541 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4542 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4543 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4544 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4546 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4548 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4551 \begin_layout Standard
4552 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4553 \begin_inset Graphics
4554 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4560 at the left end of the toolbar.
4562 will change the environment of the
4566 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4567 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4568 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4572 \begin_layout Standard
4581 create a new paragraph using the
4585 paragraph environment.
4587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4594 because if you are in one of these environments:
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4641 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4645 , rather than resetting it to
4650 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4657 reference "sec:Nesting"
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4669 The default paragraph environment is
4674 It creates a plain paragraph.
4676 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4677 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4678 this manual) are in the
4685 \begin_layout Standard
4686 You can nest a paragraph using the
4690 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4698 \begin_layout Subsection
4700 \begin_inset Index idx
4703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4714 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4723 for thanks or contact information.
4724 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 places all of this on a separate page
4726 along with today's date.
4727 For other types of documents, the title
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4741 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4755 Here's how you use them:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the title of your document in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 Put the author name in the
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4776 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4782 Note that using this environment is optional.
4783 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4784 will automatically insert today's date.
4785 If you don't want a date, use the option
4787 Suppress default date on front page
4791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4794 \begin_inset space ~
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 You can use footnotes to insert
4804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4811 or contact information.
4814 \begin_layout Subsection
4816 \begin_inset Index idx
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4828 name "subsec:Headings"
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4838 takes care of the numbering for you.
4841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4843 \begin_inset Index idx
4846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4847 Section headings ! Numbered
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4860 \begin_layout Enumerate
4866 \begin_layout Enumerate
4872 \begin_layout Enumerate
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4905 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4906 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4910 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4911 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4912 You group the book into chapters.
4914 does a similar grouping:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 is divided into either
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Itemize
4969 \begin_layout Itemize
4981 \begin_layout Itemize
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 Not all document types use the
5006 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5011 is the top-level heading.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5024 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5025 labels it with its number,
5026 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5028 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5042 \begin_inset Index idx
5045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5046 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 The unnumbered section headings have a
5056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5063 at the end of their name.
5064 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5065 the table of contents, see section
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5080 Changing the Numbering
5081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5083 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5091 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5092 in the Table of Contents.
5093 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5095 Just as certain classes start with
5109 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5119 This is something you can change.
5122 \begin_layout Standard
5125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5129 \begin_inset Index idx
5132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5141 \begin_inset space ~
5145 \begin_inset space ~
5150 you will see two counters.
5155 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5156 numbers a section heading.
5157 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5162 Short Titles of Headings
5163 \begin_inset Index idx
5166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5167 Section headings ! Short titles
5173 \begin_inset Argument 1
5176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5185 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5194 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5195 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5196 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5201 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5202 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5203 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5204 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5209 \begin_inset space ~
5215 This will insert a box labeled
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset space ~
5224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5227 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5228 This also works for captions inside floats.
5229 There can only be one short title per title.
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The following information applies to all section headings:
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5253 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5257 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5260 \begin_layout Subsection
5264 \begin_layout Standard
5266 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5280 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5281 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5282 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5283 the text they contain.
5284 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5292 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5295 \begin_layout Standard
5296 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5305 when you start a new paragraph.
5306 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5310 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5311 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5312 have to change back to the
5316 environment yourself.
5319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5328 \begin_inset Index idx
5331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5342 time for the differences.
5351 are identical except for one difference:
5355 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5364 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 Here's an example of the
5381 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5383 See – no indentation!
5387 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5388 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5389 the other paragraph.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 Here's another example, this time in the
5400 \begin_layout Quotation
5406 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5407 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5408 the first line, then
5412 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5416 you were quoting other text.
5419 \begin_layout Quotation
5420 Here's a new paragraph.
5421 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5422 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 As the examples show,
5430 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5431 They should put quotes in the
5436 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5440 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5455 \begin_inset Index idx
5458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_layout Standard
5479 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5485 \begin_inset Newline newline
5488 Which I did not rehearse!
5492 It could be much worse.
5493 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5495 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5496 indented a bit more than the first.
5497 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 And make things look fine
5507 \begin_inset Newline newline
5513 arg "newline-insert newline"
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5524 does not indent both margins.
5525 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5526 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5529 arg "newline-insert newline"
5535 \begin_layout Subsection
5537 \begin_inset Index idx
5540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5558 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5568 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5569 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5578 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5579 lets you provide your own label.
5580 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5581 describing some general features of all four of them.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5591 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5592 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5601 reset the environment to
5605 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5606 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5607 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5615 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5623 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5624 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5625 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5627 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5628 you read all of section
5629 \begin_inset space ~
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5635 reference "sec:Nesting"
5642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5644 \begin_inset Index idx
5647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5663 \begin_layout Standard
5664 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5668 paragraph environment.
5669 It has the following properties:
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5673 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The items can have any length.
5690 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5691 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 environment inside another
5707 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 \begin_inset space ~
5726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5728 reference "sec:Nesting"
5732 for a full explanation of nesting.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5746 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5751 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 The label for the first level
5759 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5764 The label for the second level is a dash.
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5773 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5779 Back out to the third level.
5783 \begin_layout Itemize
5784 Back to the second level.
5788 \begin_layout Itemize
5789 Back to the outermost level.
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5793 These are the default labels for an
5798 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5803 dialog in the submenu
5808 \begin_inset Index idx
5811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5821 \begin_layout Standard
5822 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5823 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5831 reference "sec:Nesting"
5838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5852 name "sec:Enumerate"
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5864 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5865 It has these properties:
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5888 environment resets the counter to one.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5904 \begin_layout Enumerate
5905 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5906 Items can have any length.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5913 \begin_layout Enumerate
5914 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5918 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5931 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5933 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5934 labels the four different levels in an
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 The first level of an
5946 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5950 \begin_layout Enumerate
5951 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5955 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5960 \begin_layout Enumerate
5961 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5964 \begin_layout Enumerate
5965 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5971 Back to the third level
5975 \begin_layout Enumerate
5976 Back to the second level.
5980 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 Back to the outermost level.
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5989 environment, see section
5990 \begin_inset space ~
5994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5996 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6001 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6006 There is more to nesting
6010 environments than we've stated here.
6011 You should read section
6012 \begin_inset space ~
6016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6018 reference "sec:Nesting"
6022 to learn more about nesting.
6025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6027 \begin_inset Index idx
6030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6044 list has no fixed label.
6045 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6054 of the first line as the label.
6058 \begin_layout Description
6059 Example: This is an example of the
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6068 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6072 \begin_layout Standard
6074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6081 it is meant that the first usage of the
6085 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6087 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6095 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 \begin_inset space ~
6109 \begin_inset space ~
6113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6115 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6119 for more information.) Here is an example:
6122 \begin_layout Description
6124 \begin_inset space ~
6127 Example: This one shows how to use a
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6142 \begin_layout Description
6143 Usage: You should use the
6147 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6148 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6150 It's not a good idea to use a
6154 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6155 You're better off using
6167 paragraphs into them.
6170 \begin_layout Description
6171 Nesting: You can nest
6175 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6179 \begin_layout Standard
6180 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6181 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6182 them from the first line.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6204 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6205 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6218 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6220 Here are its properties:
6223 \begin_layout Labeling
6224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6226 \begin_inset space ~
6229 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6238 of each line as the item label.
6243 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6244 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6245 space as described above.
6248 \begin_layout Labeling
6249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6250 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6251 uses different margins for the item label and the
6252 body of the item text.
6253 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6254 label width plus a little extra space.
6258 \begin_layout Labeling
6259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 width \SpecialChar LyX
6265 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6266 If the label width is larger, the label
6267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6274 into the first line.
6275 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6276 margin of the rest of the item text.
6279 \begin_layout Labeling
6280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6282 \begin_inset space ~
6285 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6290 environment has the same left margin.
6291 \begin_inset Newline newline
6294 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6304 dialog (toolbar button
6307 arg "layout-paragraph"
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6319 determines the default label width.
6320 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6329 multiple times instead.
6330 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6340 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6348 every time you alter a label in a
6353 \begin_inset Newline newline
6356 The predefined default width is the length of
6357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 \begin_inset space ~
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6376 list the same way as the
6380 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6386 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6395 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6396 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6404 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 to learn about nesting.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 There is yet another feature of the
6416 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6417 left-justifies the item labels by
6419 You can use additional
6423 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6424 justifies the item label.
6429 are documented in section
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6436 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6441 Here are some examples:
6444 \begin_layout Labeling
6445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6446 Left The default for
6453 \begin_layout Labeling
6454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6462 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6465 \begin_layout Labeling
6466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6478 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6481 \begin_layout Subsection
6483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6485 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6503 The features described in this section require that the module
6505 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6507 is loaded in the document settings.
6508 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6514 \begin_inset Index idx
6517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6519 -packages ! enumitem
6527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6528 Custom Enumerate Lists
6529 \begin_inset Index idx
6532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6533 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6541 \begin_layout Standard
6543 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6549 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6550 There you add the command
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6574 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6575 Code, look at section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6595 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6602 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6603 For capital Roman numerals replace
6615 in the command above.
6616 For Arabic numerals use
6624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6631 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 You can only number 26
6657 \begin_inset space ~
6660 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6669 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6670 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6673 \begin_layout Standard
6674 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 \begin_inset Argument 1
6681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Enumerate
6708 \begin_inset Argument 1
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 \begin_inset Argument 1
6743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 \begin_inset Argument 1
6771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Standard
6798 For this list these commands were used:
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6828 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_layout Standard
6845 makes the label emphasized and
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6864 lists until you change the definition.
6872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6874 \begin_inset Index idx
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6891 \begin_inset Argument 1
6894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_inset Note Note
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 goes back to default numbering
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6933 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6943 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6944 to indicate that it is a resumed
6945 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6946 , but in the output.
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6970 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6971 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6972 of a normal enumeration.
6973 There, insert the command
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6987 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6991 \begin_layout Enumerate
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7000 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7003 \begin_layout Enumerate
7004 \begin_inset Argument 1
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 This enumeration starts at 4
7026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7041 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7043 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7046 \begin_layout Itemize
7050 \begin_layout Itemize
7051 with standard spacing
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7057 Add there the command
7061 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7065 \begin_inset Argument 1
7068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7087 \begin_layout Itemize
7091 \begin_layout Itemize
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_inset Index idx
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 -packages ! enumitem
7114 For more information see its documentation,
7115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7127 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7128 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7132 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_inset Argument 1
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7160 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 with negative indentation
7164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7165 Further Customization
7166 \begin_inset Index idx
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 Lists ! Customization
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 You can also change the style of description lists.
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 changes the description label font, the command
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 sets the list style.
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 An example where the command
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7212 itshape, style=nextline
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7219 \begin_layout Description
7221 \begin_inset space ~
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7236 itshape, style=nextline
7246 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7247 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7251 \begin_layout Description
7253 \begin_inset space ~
7256 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7257 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7258 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7268 \begin_inset Index idx
7271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 -packages ! enumitem
7279 For more information see its documentation
7280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7289 \begin_layout Subsection
7291 \begin_inset Index idx
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 \begin_inset space ~
7308 Address: An Overview
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7313 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7321 \begin_inset space ~
7327 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7328 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7329 gags on the document.
7330 In contrast, you can use the
7337 \begin_inset space ~
7342 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7343 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 Of course, you're not limited to using
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7369 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7370 some European academic papers.
7373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7377 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7389 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7390 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7399 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7400 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7401 Here's an example of each:
7404 \begin_layout Right Address
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 \begin_inset Newline newline
7414 \begin_inset Newline newline
7417 When is it? What is today?
7420 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7430 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7432 the largest block of text on a single line.
7433 Here's an example of the
7440 \begin_layout Address
7442 \begin_inset Newline newline
7445 Where do I send this
7446 \begin_inset Newline newline
7449 Your post office and country
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 As you can see, both
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7465 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7470 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7471 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7477 This makes sense, since
7485 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7486 Thus, you have to use
7493 arg "newline-insert newline"
7498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 ) to start a new line in an
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_layout Subsection
7529 \begin_layout Standard
7530 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7531 or list of references.
7533 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7550 \begin_layout Standard
7555 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7556 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7557 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7558 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7572 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7573 The book document classes ignores the
7577 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7581 in a letter document class.
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7589 environment does several things for you.
7590 First, it puts the centered label
7591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7599 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7601 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7602 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7603 the subsequent text.
7604 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7611 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7615 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7616 The new paragraph will still be in the
7621 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7622 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7625 \begin_layout Standard
7626 \begin_inset Float figure
7631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7633 \begin_inset Graphics
7634 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7647 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 We would love to demonstrate the
7673 environment, but since this document is in the
7674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7681 class, we can't do this.
7682 We inserted it therefore as figure
7683 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7689 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7694 If you have never heard of an
7695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7702 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7726 \begin_layout Standard
7731 environment is used to list references.
7732 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7733 only use it at the end of the document.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7746 When you first open a
7750 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7751 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7767 depending on the document class.
7768 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7769 Each paragraph of the
7773 environment is a bibliography entry.
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 Each new paragraph is still in the
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7788 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7790 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7792 handling, have a look at section
7793 \begin_inset space ~
7797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7806 \begin_layout Subsection
7807 Special Environments
7810 \begin_layout Standard
7812 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7813 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7821 \begin_inset Index idx
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7834 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7847 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7849 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7854 key as a fixed whitespace.
7858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7871 \begin_inset space ~
7876 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7890 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7893 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7896 arg "newline-insert newline"
7913 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7914 So, when you finish using the
7919 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7920 Also, you can nest the
7925 environment inside of others.
7928 \begin_layout Standard
7929 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7932 \begin_layout Itemize
7936 arg "newline-insert newline"
7939 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7944 \begin_inset space \space{}
7954 arg "newline-insert newline"
7960 \begin_layout Itemize
7964 arg "newline-insert newline"
7974 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7980 \begin_layout Itemize
7981 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7982 You must put at least one
7986 in any line you want blank.
7987 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7991 \begin_layout Itemize
7992 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7996 since that will insert
8001 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8004 arg "self-insert \""
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8014 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8030 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8031 printf("Hello World!
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout Standard
8045 This is just the standard
8046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8057 \begin_layout Standard
8063 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8065 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8066 as if you used a typewriter.
8067 \begin_inset Index idx
8070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8071 Paragraph environments|)
8076 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8079 Program Code Listings
8084 \begin_inset space ~
8092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8096 \begin_inset Index idx
8099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8113 environment is similar to the
8118 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8119 computer console text.
8124 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8138 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8139 you can have empty lines.
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 have a certain language and a text style
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8158 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8159 and \SpecialChar TeX
8163 \begin_layout Standard
8164 Because of these properties
8168 works like a typewriter.
8172 \begin_layout Verbatim
8177 \begin_layout Verbatim
8181 The following 2 lines are empty:
8184 \begin_layout Verbatim
8188 \begin_layout Verbatim
8192 \begin_layout Verbatim
8194 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8199 \begin_layout Section
8200 Nesting Environments
8201 \begin_inset Index idx
8204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8205 Nesting ! Environments
8211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8220 \begin_layout Subsection
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8226 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8228 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8230 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8232 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8244 \begin_layout Enumerate
8248 \begin_layout Enumerate
8253 \begin_layout Enumerate
8257 \begin_layout Enumerate
8262 \begin_layout Enumerate
8266 \begin_layout Standard
8267 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8268 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8270 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8272 \begin_inset space ~
8276 \begin_inset space ~
8284 \begin_inset space ~
8288 \begin_inset space ~
8293 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8295 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8298 arg "depth-increment"
8304 arg "depth-decrement"
8318 arg "depth-increment"
8324 arg "depth-decrement"
8328 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8329 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8333 \begin_layout Standard
8334 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8335 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8336 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8337 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8338 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8341 \begin_layout Standard
8342 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8344 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8346 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8349 \begin_layout Subsection
8350 What You Can and Can't Nest
8353 \begin_layout Standard
8354 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8355 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8358 \begin_layout Standard
8359 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8360 than a simple yes or no.
8361 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 Completely unnestable
8368 \begin_layout Itemize
8369 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8373 \begin_layout Itemize
8374 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8378 \begin_layout Standard
8379 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8380 environments have them:
8383 \begin_layout Description
8384 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8385 Can't nest into them.
8389 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Description
8422 \begin_inset space ~
8425 Nestable You can nest them.
8426 You can nest other things into them.
8430 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_layout Itemize
8442 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_layout Itemize
8454 \begin_layout Itemize
8460 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 \begin_layout Itemize
8479 \begin_layout Itemize
8486 \begin_layout Description
8487 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8488 You can't nest anything into them.
8492 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8510 \begin_layout Itemize
8516 \begin_layout Itemize
8522 \begin_layout Itemize
8528 \begin_layout Itemize
8534 \begin_layout Itemize
8540 \begin_layout Itemize
8546 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8574 \begin_inset space ~
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8588 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8596 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8610 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8611 nested section headings violate this.
8619 \begin_layout Subsection
8620 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8621 \begin_inset Index idx
8624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8625 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8633 \begin_layout Standard
8634 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8635 affected by nesting anyhow.
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Standard
8653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8661 Figures and tables in
8665 are not affected by this.
8670 Have a look at section
8671 \begin_inset space ~
8675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8677 reference "sec:Floats"
8681 for more information about
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8690 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8691 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8704 of its own, it behaves just like a
8705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8712 paragraph environment.
8713 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8717 \begin_layout Standard
8718 Here's an example with a table:
8721 \begin_layout Enumerate
8726 \begin_layout Enumerate
8727 This is (a) and it's nested.
8731 \begin_layout Standard
8732 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8740 \begin_inset Tabular
8741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8742 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8743 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8744 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8836 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8847 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 This is (a) and it's nested.
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8867 \begin_layout Standard
8869 \begin_inset Tabular
8870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8871 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8872 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 \begin_layout Standard
8958 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8964 \begin_layout Enumerate
8971 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8974 \begin_layout Enumerate
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8983 \begin_layout Standard
8984 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8987 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8990 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 \begin_layout Enumerate
8996 This is (a) and it's nested.
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9008 \begin_inset Tabular
9009 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9010 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9012 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9097 \begin_layout Standard
9098 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9104 \begin_layout Enumerate
9106 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9113 \begin_layout Enumerate
9117 \begin_layout Standard
9118 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9124 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9125 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9129 \begin_layout Subsection
9130 Usage and General Features
9133 \begin_layout Standard
9134 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9135 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9144 is the innermost possible depth.
9145 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 level #1 – outermost
9153 \begin_layout Enumerate
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Itemize
9173 \begin_layout Itemize
9182 \begin_layout Standard
9183 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9184 both of them in the example.
9185 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9195 For example, if we tried to nest another
9200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9207 , we would get errors.
9210 \begin_layout Subsection
9212 \begin_inset Index idx
9215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9224 \begin_layout Standard
9225 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9226 We have several examples of nested environments.
9227 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9231 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9232 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9235 \begin_layout Labeling
9236 \labelwidthstring MMM
9237 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9246 \begin_layout Labeling
9247 \labelwidthstring MMM
9248 #2-a This is level #2.
9249 We created it by using
9252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9258 arg "depth-increment"
9265 \begin_layout Labeling
9266 \labelwidthstring MMM
9267 #3-a This is level #3.
9268 This time, we just enter
9275 arg "depth-increment"
9279 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9283 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9289 arg "depth-increment"
9296 \begin_layout Standard
9301 environment, nested inside of
9302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9310 So, it's at level #4.
9311 We did this by entering
9314 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9320 arg "depth-increment"
9323 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9328 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9344 \begin_layout Standard
9349 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9352 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9358 \begin_layout Labeling
9359 \labelwidthstring MMM
9360 #4-a This is level #4.
9364 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9367 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9372 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9376 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9381 keep nesting things inside
9382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9393 \begin_layout Labeling
9394 \labelwidthstring MMM
9395 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9400 \begin_layout Labeling
9401 \labelwidthstring MMM
9402 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9403 and this is level #6.
9404 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9408 \begin_layout Labeling
9409 \labelwidthstring MMM
9410 #5-b Back to level #5.
9414 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9420 arg "depth-decrement"
9427 \begin_layout Labeling
9428 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9438 arg "depth-decrement"
9441 , we're back at level #4.
9445 \begin_layout Labeling
9446 \labelwidthstring MMM
9447 #3-b Back to level #3.
9448 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9452 \begin_layout Labeling
9453 \labelwidthstring MMM
9454 #2-b Back to level #2.
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9462 After this sentence, we will enter
9466 and change the paragraph environment back to
9473 \begin_layout Standard
9474 We could have also used the
9490 environment in place of the
9495 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9499 Example 2: Inheritance
9502 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9503 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9506 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9519 \begin_inset Newline newline
9522 which, we will change to the
9530 \begin_layout Enumerate
9535 environment, at level #2.
9538 \begin_layout Enumerate
9539 Notice how the nested
9543 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9547 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9551 \begin_layout Standard
9552 We ended this example by entering
9557 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9561 and reset the nesting depth by using
9564 arg "depth-decrement"
9570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9571 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9580 \begin_inset Argument 1
9583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9584 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9592 \begin_layout Enumerate
9593 This is level #1, in an
9597 paragraph environment.
9598 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9602 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9613 arg "depth-increment"
9617 Now, what happens if we nest an
9621 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9622 label be? An asterisk?
9626 \begin_layout Itemize
9636 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9637 So, its label is a bullet.
9638 (We got here by using
9641 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9647 arg "depth-increment"
9650 , then changing the environment to
9658 \begin_layout Itemize
9659 Here's level #4, produced using
9662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9668 arg "depth-increment"
9672 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9677 \begin_layout Enumerate
9680 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9685 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9689 , because we are in the
9697 environment (that is, it is an
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9718 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9723 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9726 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9729 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9736 arg "depth-decrement"
9739 to decrease the depth after the next
9742 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9749 \begin_layout Enumerate
9751 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9756 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9759 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9764 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9773 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9778 reset the counter for the label.
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9786 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9792 arg "depth-decrement"
9795 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9796 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9797 into the twofold-nested
9805 \begin_layout Enumerate
9806 The same thing happens if we do another
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-decrement"
9818 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9821 \begin_layout Standard
9822 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9827 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9842 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9849 The same rule applies for the
9853 environment, as well.
9856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9857 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9860 \begin_layout Enumerate
9861 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9862 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9863 the same detail with how we did it.
9872 \begin_layout Standard
9880 arg "depth-increment"
9887 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9888 the example in parentheses someplace.
9889 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9890 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9891 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9895 \begin_layout Enumerate
9900 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9905 Now we will add verse.
9906 \begin_inset Newline newline
9909 It will get much worse.
9910 \begin_inset Newline newline
9920 arg "depth-increment"
9931 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9932 \begin_inset Newline newline
9935 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9936 \begin_inset Newline newline
9942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9955 \begin_layout Standard
9956 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9962 \begin_layout Standard
9964 \begin_inset Tabular
9965 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9966 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10053 \begin_layout Verse
10057 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10067 arg "depth-increment"
10073 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10079 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 arg "depth-decrement"
10094 \begin_layout Enumerate
10099 : level #1) This is another item.
10100 Note that selecting a
10104 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10105 3 times to put the table inside the
10113 \begin_layout Quotation
10114 We're now ending the
10118 list and changing to
10123 We're still at level #1.
10124 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10125 The next set of paragraphs is a
10126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10133 We will nest both the
10140 \begin_inset space ~
10145 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10149 for the letter body.
10153 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10156 to preserve the depth.
10157 Remember that you need to use
10160 arg "newline-insert newline"
10163 to create multiple lines inside the
10170 \begin_inset space ~
10180 \begin_layout Right Address
10182 \begin_inset Newline newline
10185 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10186 \begin_inset Newline newline
10192 \begin_layout Address
10194 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_layout Quotation
10201 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10205 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10206 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10207 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10208 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10209 as soon as possible.
10210 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10213 \begin_layout Quotation
10214 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10215 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10216 with your order, along with payment.
10219 \begin_layout Quotation
10220 We thank you again for your patience.
10223 \begin_layout Address
10225 \begin_inset Newline newline
10232 \begin_layout Quotation
10233 That ends that example!
10236 \begin_layout Standard
10237 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10238 gives you a lot of power with just
10240 We could have easily nested an
10261 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10264 \begin_layout Subsection
10266 \begin_inset Index idx
10269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10270 Nesting ! Separation
10276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10278 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10285 \begin_layout Standard
10286 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10288 For example you need two different enumerations:
10291 \begin_layout Enumerate
10296 \begin_layout Enumerate
10301 \begin_layout Enumerate
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10306 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10312 \begin_layout Itemize
10318 \begin_layout Standard
10319 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10325 \begin_layout Enumerate
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Standard
10338 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10339 list item and use the menu
10341 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10342 Start New Environment
10345 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10347 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10350 arg "paragraph-break"
10354 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10355 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10356 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10357 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10360 \begin_layout Standard
10361 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10364 arg "paragraph-break"
10367 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10370 \begin_layout Section
10371 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10372 \begin_inset Index idx
10375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10384 \begin_layout Standard
10385 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10386 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10388 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10389 be broken at the end of a line.
10390 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10394 \begin_layout Subsection
10396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10398 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10403 \begin_inset Index idx
10406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10415 \begin_layout Standard
10416 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10417 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10418 ) not to break the line at
10420 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10423 \begin_layout Quote
10424 Further documentation is given in section
10425 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10431 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10439 \begin_layout Standard
10440 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10455 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10464 A protected space is set with
10466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10467 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10469 \begin_inset space ~
10477 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10483 \begin_layout Subsection
10485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10487 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10492 \begin_inset Index idx
10495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10496 Spacing ! Horizontal
10504 \begin_layout Standard
10505 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10508 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10512 The length units are listed in Appendix
10513 \begin_inset space ~
10517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10519 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10530 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10535 \begin_inset Index idx
10538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10539 Spaces ! Inter-word
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10549 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10550 at the ends of sentences.
10551 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10552 automatically takes care about this.
10553 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10554 followed by a period; see section
10555 \begin_inset space ~
10559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10561 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10566 To insert a normal space, select
10568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10569 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10571 \begin_inset space ~
10579 arg "space-insert normal"
10585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10589 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10594 \begin_inset Index idx
10597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10606 \begin_layout Standard
10608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10615 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10624 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10625 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10626 inside abbreviations:
10629 \begin_layout Quote
10631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10635 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 or between values and units.
10640 Compare for example this:
10641 \begin_inset Newline newline
10645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10649 \begin_inset Newline newline
10652 10 kg (normal space
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10656 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10659 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10669 arg "space-insert thin"
10675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 You can also insert the following space types:
10683 \begin_layout Description
10685 \begin_inset space ~
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10692 space A line with a
10693 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10697 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10701 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10704 negative thin space between the arrows.
10707 \begin_layout Description
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10716 space A line with a
10717 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10721 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10725 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10728 negative medium space between the arrows.
10731 \begin_layout Description
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10740 space A line with a
10741 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10745 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10749 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10752 negative thick space between the arrows.
10755 \begin_layout Description
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10765 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10769 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10773 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10784 em) space between the arrows.
10787 \begin_layout Description
10789 \begin_inset space ~
10793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10797 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10801 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10805 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10809 \begin_inset space ~
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 em) space between the arrows.
10819 \begin_layout Description
10821 \begin_inset space ~
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10829 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10833 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10837 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 em) space between the arrows.
10851 \begin_layout Description
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10857 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10861 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10866 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10873 cm space between the arrows.
10876 \begin_layout Standard
10878 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10884 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10888 lists the different space sizes.
10891 \begin_layout Standard
10892 \begin_inset Float table
10897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10898 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10903 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10907 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10917 \begin_inset Tabular
10918 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10919 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11196 \begin_inset Index idx
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_layout Standard
11209 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11210 feature for adding extra space
11211 in a uniform fashion.
11212 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11213 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11214 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11215 equally between themselves.
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11219 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11222 \begin_layout Quote
11224 This is on the left side
11225 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11228 This is on the right
11231 \begin_layout Quote
11234 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11238 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11244 \begin_layout Quote
11247 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11262 That was an example in the
11268 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11279 is one in a standard paragraph.
11280 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11284 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11287 \begin_layout Standard
11288 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11291 \begin_inset space ~
11296 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11299 \begin_layout Standard
11301 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11305 \begin_inset space ~
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11313 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11317 \begin_inset space ~
11323 \begin_layout Standard
11325 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11329 \begin_inset space ~
11335 \begin_layout Standard
11337 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11341 \begin_inset space ~
11347 \begin_layout Standard
11349 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11359 \begin_layout Standard
11361 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11365 \begin_inset space ~
11371 \begin_layout Standard
11372 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11380 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11384 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11386 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11387 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11391 option in the space dialog.
11399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11403 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11408 \begin_inset Index idx
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11422 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11425 \begin_layout Standard
11426 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11429 What is correct English?:
11430 \begin_inset Newline newline
11434 \begin_inset Newline newline
11438 \begin_inset space ~
11441 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11442 \begin_inset Newline newline
11446 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11457 \begin_inset Newline newline
11461 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11472 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11478 \begin_layout Standard
11480 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11497 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11500 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11504 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11521 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11530 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11531 That is why it is named
11532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11540 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11541 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11545 \begin_layout Subsection
11547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11549 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11554 \begin_inset Index idx
11557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11566 \begin_layout Standard
11567 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11570 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11572 \begin_inset space ~
11578 There you find the following sizes:
11581 \begin_layout Standard
11594 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11595 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11600 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11603 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11605 \begin_inset space ~
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11615 Document ! Settings
11620 for the paragraph separation.
11621 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11632 \begin_layout Standard
11638 \begin_inset Index idx
11641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11648 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11653 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11654 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11663 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 s are described in section
11673 \begin_inset space ~
11677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11679 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11688 If there are several
11692 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11693 You can therefore use
11697 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11700 \begin_layout Standard
11705 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11706 \begin_inset space ~
11710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11712 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11719 \begin_layout Standard
11720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11731 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11744 Paragraph Alignment
11745 \begin_inset Index idx
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11749 Paragraph ! Alignment
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11758 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11763 dialog (toolbar button
11766 arg "layout-paragraph"
11770 There are five possibilities:
11773 \begin_layout Itemize
11781 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11787 \begin_layout Itemize
11795 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11801 \begin_layout Itemize
11809 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11815 \begin_layout Itemize
11823 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11829 \begin_layout Itemize
11837 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11843 \begin_layout Standard
11844 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11845 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11846 the left and right margins.
11847 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11850 \begin_layout Standard
11852 This paragraph is right aligned,
11855 \begin_layout Standard
11857 this one is centered,
11860 \begin_layout Standard
11862 this one is left aligned.
11865 \begin_layout Subsection
11867 \begin_inset Index idx
11870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 Page breaks ! Forced
11877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11879 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11886 \begin_layout Standard
11887 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11888 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11889 force a page break where you want one.
11890 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11891 is good at page breaking.
11892 Only if you use a lot of
11896 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11897 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11901 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11902 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11906 have to change the page breaking.
11909 \begin_layout Standard
11910 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11912 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11915 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11917 \begin_inset space ~
11923 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11928 \begin_inset space ~
11933 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11935 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11936 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11939 \begin_layout Standard
11940 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11941 at the top of a page.
11942 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11944 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11945 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11946 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11950 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11954 to learn more about
11961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11965 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11970 \begin_inset Index idx
11973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11974 Page breaks ! Clear
11982 \begin_layout Standard
11983 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11984 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11985 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11986 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11987 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11990 \begin_layout Standard
11991 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11994 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11996 \begin_inset space ~
12002 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12005 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12007 \begin_inset space ~
12011 \begin_inset space ~
12016 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12017 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12020 \begin_layout Subsection
12022 \begin_inset Index idx
12025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12034 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12044 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12047 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12049 \begin_inset space ~
12053 \begin_inset space ~
12061 arg "newline-insert newline"
12065 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12068 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12082 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12085 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12087 This is useful to avoid
12088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12095 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12102 very good at line breaking.
12103 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12104 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12105 \begin_inset space ~
12109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12111 reference "sec:Quote"
12116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12118 reference "sec:Verse"
12123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12125 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12132 \begin_layout Subsection
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12136 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12141 \begin_inset Index idx
12144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12153 \begin_layout Standard
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12171 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12173 \begin_inset space ~
12178 you can insert horizontal lines.
12179 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12180 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12181 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12186 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12197 \begin_layout Section
12198 Characters and Symbols
12201 \begin_layout Standard
12202 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12203 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12204 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12212 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12216 for information on how this is done.
12219 \begin_layout Standard
12220 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12225 dialog via the menu
12227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12228 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12234 \begin_layout Standard
12235 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12243 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12244 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12246 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12254 \begin_layout Section
12255 Fonts and Text Styles
12256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12258 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12265 \begin_layout Subsection
12267 \begin_inset Index idx
12270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12279 \begin_layout Standard
12280 There are two types of fonts:
12283 \begin_layout Description
12285 \begin_inset space ~
12289 \begin_inset Index idx
12292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12298 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12303 characters) in the font.
12304 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12305 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12306 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12307 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12308 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12309 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12310 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12311 \begin_inset Newline newline
12314 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12315 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12316 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12317 sizes than at small ones.
12318 \begin_inset Newline newline
12332 \begin_inset space ~
12340 \begin_layout Description
12342 \begin_inset space ~
12346 \begin_inset Index idx
12349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12356 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12357 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12358 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12359 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12360 image manipulation program.
12361 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12362 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12363 \begin_inset space ~
12366 pixels high up to 34
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12370 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12371 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12372 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12374 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12375 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12376 \begin_inset Newline newline
12379 Bitmap fonts are named
12382 \begin_inset space ~
12387 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12390 \begin_layout Standard
12391 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12392 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12393 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12394 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12395 use scalable fonts.
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12404 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12405 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12406 font to emphasize text, you use an
12407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12415 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12417 In \SpecialChar LyX
12418 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12422 \begin_layout Subsection
12425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12427 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12436 used its own fonts.
12437 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12438 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12441 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12442 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12443 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12444 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12445 to a word processor.
12446 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12447 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12448 files are very portable across
12449 different machines.
12450 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12451 has increased a lot
12452 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12455 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12457 \begin_inset space ~
12461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12463 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12468 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12469 code in the document
12470 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12473 \begin_layout Standard
12474 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12475 engines that are also able directly
12476 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12478 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12480 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12482 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12483 that is installed on your system.
12484 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12487 \begin_layout Standard
12488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12497 es; so you might have to experiment.
12505 \begin_layout Standard
12506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12515 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12516 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12517 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12518 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12527 \begin_layout Subsection
12528 Document Font and Font size
12529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12531 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12536 \begin_inset Index idx
12539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 \begin_layout Standard
12559 You can set the document fonts in the
12561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12565 \begin_inset Index idx
12568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12569 Document ! Settings
12579 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12580 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12583 \begin_inset space ~
12592 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12597 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12605 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12606 This requires that you use
12618 as the output format, i.
12619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12623 \begin_inset space \space{}
12626 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12627 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12628 installed (see section
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12635 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12640 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12642 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12643 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12645 \begin_inset space ~
12648 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12649 cannot determine the family.
12650 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12651 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12654 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12657 \begin_layout Standard
12658 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12659 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12664 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12670 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12671 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12679 \begin_inset space ~
12685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12698 European Computer Modern
12701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12708 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12711 \begin_layout Standard
12720 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12721 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12729 \begin_inset space ~
12734 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12740 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12741 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12744 \begin_layout Itemize
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12753 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12766 \begin_inset space ~
12771 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12772 community in order to replace
12776 as the default font.
12777 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12778 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12781 \begin_inset space ~
12794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12795 One difference is improved kerning.
12803 \begin_layout Itemize
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset space ~
12816 fonts in (the rare) case that
12819 \begin_inset space ~
12824 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12839 Virtual means that it
12840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12851 -glyphs from other fonts.
12852 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12874 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12880 \begin_inset Index idx
12883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12885 -packages ! aeguill
12890 with the document preamble line
12891 \begin_inset Newline newline
12898 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12899 \begin_inset Newline newline
12904 will fix the guillemet problem.
12909 and that accented characters are not
12913 glyph, but built of
12917 characters, the accent and the letter.
12918 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12924 If you search for example for the French word
12925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12932 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12941 and not for the glyph
12942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12946 \begin_inset space ~
12950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12956 \begin_layout Itemize
12957 If you do not like the look of
12965 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12976 \begin_inset space ~
12986 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12987 \begin_inset space ~
12990 serif and typewriter fonts,
12994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12995 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13011 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13016 \begin_inset space \space{}
13024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13028 \begin_inset space \space{}
13034 \begin_inset space ~
13042 \begin_inset space ~
13052 but you can also select your own.
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13056 The differences between roman,
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13068 fonts are explained in section
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13075 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13080 \begin_inset Newline newline
13086 \begin_inset space ~
13091 was originally designed for newspapers.
13092 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13093 into the small newspaper columns.
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13102 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13105 \begin_layout Standard
13106 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13119 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13124 depends on the class you are using.
13125 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13128 \begin_layout Standard
13129 Note that the font size is the
13134 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13135 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13136 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13137 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13146 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13153 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13160 \begin_layout Standard
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13169 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13174 serif or typewriter.
13179 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13189 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13197 LaTeX font encoding
13199 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13200 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13206 \begin_inset Index idx
13209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13211 -packages ! fontenc
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13223 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13228 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13229 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13237 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13239 Use Old Style Figures
13243 Use True Small Caps
13246 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13249 Use Old Style Figures
13251 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13253 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13261 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13265 Use True Small Caps
13267 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13268 of scaled capitals.
13269 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13270 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13278 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13279 a font to display the script characters.
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13284 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13290 \begin_inset Index idx
13293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13300 So this has no effect for the document language
13314 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13326 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13331 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13332 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13334 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13336 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13339 dialog, see section
13340 \begin_inset space ~
13344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13346 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13358 \begin_layout Subsection
13362 \begin_layout Standard
13363 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13364 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13366 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13367 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13368 choose a math font in the dialog
13370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13374 \begin_inset Index idx
13377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13378 Document ! Settings
13384 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13385 automatically selects a math font.
13386 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13387 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13407 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13408 document font is available.
13411 \begin_layout Standard
13412 Note that the math font will not be used for
13416 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13422 or by the insertion of the command
13429 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13430 \begin_inset space ~
13434 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13435 while the math characters do not.
13437 \begin_inset space ~
13440 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13443 \begin_inset space ~
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13456 in the document font settings.
13459 \begin_layout Standard
13460 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13461 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13462 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13463 font (in most cases
13464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13470 \begin_inset space ~
13476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13479 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13480 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13488 \begin_inset space ~
13494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13500 \begin_layout Subsection
13501 Using Different Character Styles
13502 \begin_inset Index idx
13505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13512 \begin_inset Index idx
13515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13526 automatically changes the character style for certain
13527 paragraph environments.
13529 supports two character styles,
13538 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13542 \begin_layout Standard
13547 style, do one of the following:
13550 \begin_layout Itemize
13551 click on the toolbar button
13560 \begin_layout Itemize
13561 use the key binding
13570 \begin_layout Standard
13571 These commands are all toggles.
13576 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13579 \begin_layout Standard
13580 One typically uses the
13584 style for proper names.
13586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13593 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13601 \begin_layout Standard
13602 A more widely used character style is the
13607 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13614 \begin_layout Itemize
13615 clicking on the toolbar button
13624 \begin_layout Itemize
13625 using the keybindings
13634 \begin_layout Standard
13639 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13641 use a different font.
13644 \begin_layout Standard
13645 We've been using the
13649 style all over the place in this document.
13650 Here's one more example:
13653 \begin_layout Quotation
13656 Do not overuse character styles!
13659 \begin_layout Standard
13660 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13661 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13662 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13663 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13668 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13676 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13678 \begin_inset space ~
13681 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13687 arg "dialog-show character"
13693 \begin_layout Subsection
13694 Fine-Tuning with the
13699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13701 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13706 \begin_inset Index idx
13709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13718 \begin_layout Standard
13719 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13721 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13722 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13723 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13724 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13725 from ordinary dialog.
13728 \begin_layout Standard
13729 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13730 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13731 \begin_inset Newline newline
13734 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13735 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 To use custom character styles, open the
13741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13746 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13749 dialog or press the toolbar button
13752 arg "dialog-show character"
13756 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13757 font property that you can choose.
13758 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13761 \begin_inset space ~
13766 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13771 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13772 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13773 environments all at once.
13776 \begin_layout Standard
13777 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13780 \begin_inset space ~
13792 \begin_layout Labeling
13793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13807 The possible options are:
13811 \begin_layout Labeling
13812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13817 This is the Roman font family.
13818 Normally a serif font.
13819 It's also the default family.
13829 \begin_layout Labeling
13830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13834 \begin_inset space ~
13841 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13853 \begin_layout Labeling
13854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13861 This is the Typewriter font family.
13867 arg "font-typewriter"
13876 \begin_layout Labeling
13877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13882 This corresponds to the print weight.
13887 \begin_layout Labeling
13888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 This is the Medium font series.
13894 It's also the default series.
13897 \begin_layout Labeling
13898 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13905 This is the Bold font series.
13918 \begin_layout Labeling
13919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13924 As the name implies.
13929 \begin_layout Labeling
13930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13935 This is the Upright font shape.
13936 It's also the default shape.
13939 \begin_layout Labeling
13940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13954 s the Italic font shape
13960 \begin_layout Labeling
13961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13968 This is the Slanted font shape
13970 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13971 , this is different from italic).
13974 \begin_layout Labeling
13975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13986 This is the Small caps font shape
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13999 Alters the text color.
14000 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14004 \begin_inset space ~
14009 , which means that the document default color set in
14011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14012 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14018 \begin_inset space ~
14023 is used, you can choose between
14056 \begin_inset Index idx
14059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14068 \begin_layout Labeling
14069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14074 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14075 the language of the document.
14076 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14077 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14079 \begin_inset Newline newline
14082 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14084 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14085 When using the spell checking (see section
14086 \begin_inset space ~
14090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14092 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14096 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14099 \begin_layout Labeling
14100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14105 Alters the size of the font.
14106 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14107 proportional to the document font size.
14108 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14109 the details, but a general description of what
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14137 arg "font-size tiny"
14143 \begin_layout Labeling
14144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14165 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14171 \begin_layout Labeling
14172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14193 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14199 \begin_layout Labeling
14200 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14221 arg "font-size small"
14227 \begin_layout Labeling
14228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14242 It's also the default size.
14246 arg "font-size normal"
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size large"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size larger"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14330 arg "font-size largest"
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14358 arg "font-size huge"
14364 \begin_layout Labeling
14365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14386 arg "font-size giant"
14392 \begin_layout Labeling
14393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14418 arg "font-size increase"
14424 \begin_layout Labeling
14425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14430 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 arg "font-size decrease"
14457 \begin_layout Standard
14462 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14463 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14465 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14466 — use those instead.
14467 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14470 \begin_layout Labeling
14471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14476 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14481 \begin_layout Labeling
14482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14489 This is text with emphasize on
14492 This might seem like the same as
14496 , but it is actually a bit different.
14502 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14504 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14507 \begin_layout Labeling
14508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 This is text with Underbar on.
14521 arg "font-underline"
14527 \begin_inset Newline newline
14532 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14533 when you could not change fonts.
14534 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14535 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14536 because some people
14540 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14543 \begin_layout Labeling
14544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 \begin_inset space ~
14555 This is text with Double underbar on.
14561 arg "font-underunderline"
14565 \begin_inset Newline newline
14568 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14569 about double underbar.
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14577 \begin_inset space ~
14584 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14590 arg "font-underwave"
14594 \begin_inset Newline newline
14597 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14598 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14601 \begin_layout Labeling
14602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14609 This is text with Strikeout on.
14615 arg "font-strikeout"
14619 \begin_inset Newline newline
14622 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14623 changed in the meantime.
14626 \begin_layout Labeling
14627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14634 This is text with Noun on.
14641 , this is a logical attribute.
14642 Normally it's equivalent to
14645 \begin_inset space ~
14654 \begin_layout Standard
14655 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14656 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14658 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14660 \begin_inset space ~
14663 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14669 arg "dialog-show character"
14672 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14673 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14676 arg "textstyle-apply"
14680 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14684 \begin_layout Standard
14685 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14692 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14693 (suppose you just set the shape to
14694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14712 \begin_inset space ~
14724 \begin_layout Standard
14725 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14733 \begin_inset space ~
14745 \begin_layout Itemize
14751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14758 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14776 \begin_inset Newline newline
14780 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14794 \begin_inset Note Note
14797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14798 For more on phantoms see section
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14805 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14815 \begin_inset Newline newline
14821 \begin_layout Itemize
14826 fonts use characters with serifs.
14827 These are the small
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14835 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14836 The following example shows the difference:
14837 \begin_inset Newline newline
14841 \begin_inset Newline newline
14846 text without serifs
14849 \begin_inset Newline newline
14852 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14853 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14860 \begin_layout Itemize
14865 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14866 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14867 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14878 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14879 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14887 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14888 the property to be removed.
14889 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14890 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14891 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14909 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14910 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14918 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14922 \begin_inset space ~
14927 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14938 If you, for example, set
14939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 \begin_inset space ~
14962 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14974 \begin_layout Standard
14975 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14976 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14979 \begin_layout Section
14980 Printing and Previewing
14983 \begin_layout Subsection
14987 \begin_layout Standard
14988 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14989 using \SpecialChar LyX
14990 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14991 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14992 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14993 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14995 Additional Features
15000 \begin_layout Standard
15002 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15005 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15006 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15007 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15010 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15011 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15012 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15013 to turn your writing into printable output.
15014 This happens in two stages:
15017 \begin_layout Enumerate
15018 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15019 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15021 a file with the extension,
15022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15036 \begin_layout Enumerate
15037 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15038 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15039 to use the commands in the
15043 file to produce printable output.
15046 \begin_layout Subsection
15047 Output file formats
15048 \begin_inset Index idx
15051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15060 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15068 Simple text (ASCII)
15069 \begin_inset Index idx
15072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15073 File formats ! ASCII
15081 \begin_layout Standard
15082 This file type has the extension
15083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15095 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15099 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 \begin_layout Standard
15107 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15109 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15110 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15112 \begin_inset space ~
15118 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15119 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15120 bibliography (section
15121 \begin_inset space ~
15125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15127 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15132 If your document includes such material, use
15134 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15135 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15137 \begin_inset space ~
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15145 \begin_inset space ~
15153 \begin_inset space ~
15157 \begin_inset space ~
15163 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15164 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15170 \begin_inset Index idx
15173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15174 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15183 \begin_layout Standard
15184 This file type has the extension
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15196 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15199 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15200 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15201 -Errors or to process it manually
15202 with console commands.
15203 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15204 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15205 's temporary directory whenever you
15206 view or export your document.
15209 \begin_layout Standard
15210 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 -file using the menu
15213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15214 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15218 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 export variants are explained in section
15220 \begin_inset space ~
15224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15226 reference "subsec:Export"
15233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15235 \begin_inset Index idx
15238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15247 \begin_layout Standard
15248 This file type has the extension
15249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15269 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15270 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15271 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15275 \begin_layout Standard
15276 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15277 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15278 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15279 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15280 when you view the DVI.
15281 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15284 \begin_layout Standard
15285 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15287 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15288 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15293 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15294 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15302 The latter option uses the program
15304 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15310 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15313 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15314 font access (see section
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15321 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15326 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15327 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15334 \begin_inset Index idx
15337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15338 File formats ! PostScript
15346 \begin_layout Standard
15347 This file type has the extension
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15360 PostScript was developed by the company
15364 as a printer language.
15365 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15367 PostScript can be seen as a
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 programming language
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15375 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15380 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15387 \begin_inset Index idx
15390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15392 -packages ! pstricks
15402 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15405 \begin_layout Standard
15406 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15410 Encapsulated PostScript
15411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15414 (EPS, file extension
15415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15427 As \SpecialChar LyX
15428 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15429 convert them in the background to EPS.
15430 If, for example, you have 50
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15434 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15439 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15440 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15442 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15443 EPS to avoid this problem.
15446 \begin_layout Standard
15447 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15449 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15450 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15458 \begin_inset Index idx
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 \begin_inset Index idx
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 This file type has the extension
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15498 Portable Document Format
15499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15506 was derived from PostScript.
15507 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15516 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15517 looks exactly the same.
15520 \begin_layout Standard
15521 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15525 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15529 (JPG, file extension
15530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15557 Portable Network Graphics
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 (PNG, file extension
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15575 converts them in the
15576 background to one of these formats.
15577 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15578 will slow down your workflow.
15579 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15582 \begin_layout Standard
15583 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15585 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15591 \begin_layout Description
15593 \begin_inset space ~
15596 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15600 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15603 \begin_layout Description
15605 \begin_inset space ~
15612 ) This uses the program
15614 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15617 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15620 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15623 is a new engine, derived from
15627 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15628 access (see section
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15635 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15640 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15641 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15646 \begin_layout Description
15648 \begin_inset space ~
15655 ) This uses the program
15660 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15666 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15667 font access (see section
15668 \begin_inset space ~
15672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15674 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15679 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15680 vertically written Japanese.
15683 \begin_layout Description
15685 \begin_inset space ~
15688 (cropped) This is the same as
15691 \begin_inset space ~
15696 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15697 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15698 to generate good-looking
15699 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15702 \begin_layout Description
15704 \begin_inset space ~
15707 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15711 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15715 \begin_layout Description
15717 \begin_inset space ~
15720 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15724 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15725 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15729 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15730 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15733 \begin_layout Standard
15737 \begin_inset space ~
15746 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15747 works without problems.
15748 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15749 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15753 \begin_inset space ~
15761 \begin_inset space ~
15766 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15776 \begin_inset Index idx
15779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15780 FileFormats ! XHTML
15786 \begin_inset Index idx
15789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15798 \begin_layout Standard
15799 This file type has the extension
15800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15812 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15813 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15814 When \SpecialChar LyX
15815 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15816 suitable for the purpose.
15817 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15823 between different formats, which are described in section
15825 Math Output in XHTML
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15838 \begin_layout Standard
15839 XHTML output remains
15840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15847 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15848 features are supported yet.
15852 and the World Wide Web
15856 Additional Features
15858 manual, for more information.
15861 \begin_layout Standard
15862 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15864 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15865 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15871 \begin_layout Subsection
15873 \begin_inset Index idx
15876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15885 \begin_layout Standard
15886 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15887 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15896 or use the toolbar button
15903 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15904 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15911 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15915 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15923 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15928 Further output formats can be selected via
15930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15931 View (Other Formats)
15933 or the toolbar button
15934 \begin_inset Graphics
15935 filename ../images/view-others.png
15937 groupId toolbarbuttons
15944 \begin_layout Standard
15945 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15946 viewer window using the menu
15948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15954 Update (Other Formats)
15959 \begin_layout Standard
15960 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15963 To have a real output, export your document.
15966 \begin_layout Section
15967 A few Words about Typography
15968 \begin_inset Index idx
15971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15980 \begin_layout Subsection
15981 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15982 \begin_inset Index idx
15985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15992 \begin_inset Index idx
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 \begin_layout Standard
16005 In \SpecialChar LyX
16007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16018 character comes in four lengths: the
16030 , and the minus sign:
16031 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16037 \begin_layout Standard
16038 \begin_inset Tabular
16039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16040 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16041 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16044 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16073 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16113 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16140 \begin_inset space ~
16143 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16177 \begin_inset space ~
16180 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16241 \begin_layout Standard
16242 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16254 character multiple times in a row.
16255 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16256 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16289 \begin_layout Standard
16290 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16291 math mode and has a length of its own.
16292 Here are some examples:
16295 \begin_layout Enumerate
16296 line- and page-breaks
16297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16307 \begin_layout Enumerate
16309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16319 \begin_layout Enumerate
16320 Oh — there's a dash.
16321 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16331 \begin_layout Enumerate
16332 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16336 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16346 \begin_layout Subsection
16348 \begin_inset Index idx
16351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16360 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16367 \begin_layout Standard
16368 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16369 but automatically in the output.
16370 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16376 \begin_inset Index idx
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16386 following the rules of the document language.
16389 \begin_layout Standard
16391 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16395 font and with unusual constructs, like
16396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16404 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16405 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16406 This is done with the menu
16408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16409 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16411 \begin_inset space ~
16417 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16419 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16423 \begin_layout Standard
16424 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16425 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16436 would then see the hyphen
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 as a hyphenation possibility.
16445 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16446 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16447 as described in section
16448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 Prevent Hyphenation
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 \begin_inset space ~
16466 \begin_layout Subsection
16468 \begin_inset Index idx
16471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16481 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16484 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16491 \begin_layout Standard
16492 When \SpecialChar LyX
16493 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16494 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16496 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 appropriate amount of space.
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16506 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16508 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16509 gets after another word.
16512 \begin_layout Standard
16513 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16514 not work in all cases.
16516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16527 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16528 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16531 \begin_layout Standard
16532 Here are some examples of
16536 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16539 \begin_layout Itemize
16544 \begin_layout Itemize
16549 \begin_layout Standard
16550 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16553 \begin_layout Itemize
16555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16559 this is too much space!
16562 \begin_layout Itemize
16567 \begin_layout Standard
16568 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16571 \begin_layout Standard
16572 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16575 \begin_layout Enumerate
16579 \begin_inset space ~
16584 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16585 \begin_inset space ~
16589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16591 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16596 \begin_inset Index idx
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16600 Spaces ! inter-word
16608 \begin_layout Enumerate
16612 \begin_inset space ~
16617 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16618 \begin_inset space ~
16622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16624 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16629 \begin_inset Index idx
16632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16641 \begin_layout Enumerate
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16653 \begin_inset space ~
16660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16662 \begin_inset space ~
16667 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16668 This function is also bound to
16671 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16677 \begin_layout Standard
16678 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16681 \begin_layout Itemize
16683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16687 \begin_inset space \space{}
16690 this is too much space!
16693 \begin_layout Itemize
16694 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16698 \begin_layout Standard
16699 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16700 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16702 will take care of this.
16705 \begin_layout Standard
16706 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16710 \begin_inset space ~
16716 feature described in the section
16718 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16723 Additional Features
16728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16730 \begin_inset Index idx
16733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16734 Typography ! Quotes
16740 \begin_inset Index idx
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16774 \begin_layout Standard
16776 usually sets quotes correctly.
16777 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16778 and use a closing quote at the end.
16780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16788 The keyboard character,
16792 , generates this automatically.
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 You can specify what character the
16800 key produces using the submenu
16806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16810 \begin_inset Index idx
16813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16814 Document ! Settings
16824 There are six choices:
16827 \begin_layout Labeling
16828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16851 \begin_layout Labeling
16852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16855 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16859 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16865 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16869 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16875 \begin_layout Labeling
16876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16879 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16883 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16889 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16893 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16899 \begin_layout Labeling
16900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16903 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16907 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16913 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16917 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16923 \begin_layout Labeling
16924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16927 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16931 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16937 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16941 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16947 \begin_layout Labeling
16948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16951 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16955 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16961 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16965 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16971 \begin_layout Standard
16972 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16975 arg "quote-insert single"
16981 \begin_layout Subsection
16983 \begin_inset Index idx
16986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16987 Typography ! Ligatures
16993 \begin_inset Index idx
16996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17027 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17036 print them as single characters.
17037 These groups are known as
17042 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17043 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17045 Here are the standard ligatures:
17048 \begin_layout Itemize
17052 \begin_layout Itemize
17056 \begin_layout Itemize
17060 \begin_layout Itemize
17064 \begin_layout Itemize
17068 \begin_layout Standard
17069 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17072 \begin_layout Standard
17073 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17074 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17082 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17098 To break a ligature, use
17100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17121 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17138 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17146 \begin_layout Subsection
17148 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17150 \begin_inset Index idx
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17163 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17170 \begin_layout Standard
17173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17177 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17180 \begin_layout Description
17182 The name of the game.
17185 \begin_layout Description
17187 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17191 \begin_layout Description
17193 The \SpecialChar TeX
17194 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17198 \begin_layout Description
17199 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17200 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17204 \begin_layout Standard
17205 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17211 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17219 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17220 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17221 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17222 converges to the number
17223 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17226 : The actual version is
17227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17235 , the previous one was
17236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17247 \begin_layout Subsection
17249 \begin_inset Index idx
17252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17261 \begin_layout Standard
17262 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17263 space between two words.
17264 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 for units use the menu
17276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17279 \begin_inset space ~
17287 arg "space-insert thin"
17293 \begin_layout Standard
17294 Here is an example to show the differences:
17297 \begin_layout Standard
17298 \begin_inset Tabular
17299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17300 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17301 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17302 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17313 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17325 space between number and unit
17332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17341 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 half space between number and unit
17366 \begin_layout Subsection
17368 \begin_inset Index idx
17371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17372 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17380 \begin_layout Standard
17381 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17383 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17384 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17385 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17386 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17387 These bits of text became known as
17398 \begin_layout Standard
17399 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17400 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17401 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17402 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17403 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17404 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17405 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17406 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17407 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17408 \begin_inset Newline newline
17416 \begin_inset Newline newline
17424 \begin_inset Newline newline
17427 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17428 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17429 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17435 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17437 key "latexcompanion"
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17446 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17452 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17453 's page break mechanism.
17456 \begin_layout Chapter
17457 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17460 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17467 \begin_layout Standard
17468 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17471 \begin_inset space ~
17477 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17480 \begin_layout Section
17482 \begin_inset Index idx
17485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17501 \begin_layout Standard
17503 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17506 \begin_layout Description
17509 \begin_inset space ~
17512 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17513 \begin_inset Newline newline
17517 \begin_inset Note Note
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17521 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17529 \begin_layout Description
17530 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17531 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17532 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17535 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17536 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17538 \begin_inset space ~
17544 \begin_inset Newline newline
17548 \begin_inset Note Comment
17551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17552 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17561 \begin_layout Description
17563 \begin_inset space ~
17566 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17567 set in the document settings under
17569 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17577 \begin_inset Newline newline
17581 \begin_inset Newline newline
17585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17594 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17595 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17600 of a comment that appears in the output.
17606 \begin_inset Newline newline
17610 \begin_inset Newline newline
17613 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17616 \begin_layout Standard
17617 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17629 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17632 \begin_layout Section
17634 \begin_inset Index idx
17637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17646 name "sec:Footnotes"
17653 \begin_layout Standard
17655 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17661 or the toolbar button
17664 arg "footnote-insert"
17676 \begin_inset Graphics
17677 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17686 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17687 's representation of your footnote.
17697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17716 label, the box will
17720 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17721 Clicking on the box label again will close
17734 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17735 and click on the footnote
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 Here is an example footnote:
17759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17760 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17768 \begin_layout Standard
17769 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17770 position where the footnote box is placed.
17771 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17772 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17773 according to the document class.
17775 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17776 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17782 ey are described in the
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17793 \begin_layout Section
17795 \begin_inset Index idx
17798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17807 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17817 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17826 or the toolbar button
17829 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17855 appearing within your text.
17856 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17857 's representation of your margin
17866 \begin_layout Standard
17867 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17871 \begin_inset Marginal
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17876 This is a marginal note.
17884 \begin_layout Standard
17885 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17886 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17887 pages, right on odd pages.
17890 \begin_layout Standard
17891 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17894 \begin_inset space ~
17902 \begin_inset space ~
17910 \begin_layout Section
17911 Graphics and Images
17912 \begin_inset Index idx
17915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17922 \begin_inset Index idx
17925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17934 name "sec:Graphics"
17941 \begin_layout Standard
17942 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17943 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17946 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17955 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17958 \begin_layout Standard
17959 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17964 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17965 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17967 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17968 \begin_inset space ~
17972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17974 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17981 \begin_layout Standard
17986 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17987 of the image in the output.
17988 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18009 \begin_inset space ~
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18018 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18019 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18027 \begin_layout Standard
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18035 \begin_inset space ~
18040 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18041 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18043 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18048 \begin_inset space ~
18053 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18054 with the image size is printed.
18057 \begin_layout Standard
18058 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18059 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18061 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18064 \begin_layout Standard
18066 \begin_inset Graphics
18067 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18077 the image into a float, see section
18078 \begin_inset space ~
18082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18084 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18091 \begin_layout Subsection
18093 \begin_inset Index idx
18096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18105 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18112 \begin_layout Standard
18113 You can insert images in any known file format.
18114 But as we explained in section
18115 \begin_inset space ~
18119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18121 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18125 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18127 therefore uses the program
18131 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18132 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18133 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18134 \begin_inset space ~
18138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18140 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18147 \begin_layout Standard
18148 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18151 \begin_layout Description
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18156 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18157 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18158 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18162 Graphics Interchange Format
18163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18166 (GIF, file extension
18167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 \begin_inset Index idx
18182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18214 Portable Network Graphics
18215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18218 (PNG, file extension
18219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18231 \begin_inset Index idx
18234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18266 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18270 (JPG, file extension
18271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18295 \begin_inset Index idx
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 \begin_layout Description
18331 \begin_inset space ~
18334 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18336 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18337 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18338 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18339 \begin_inset Newline newline
18342 Scalable image formats can be
18343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18346 Scalable Vector Graphics
18347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18350 (SVG, file extension
18351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 \begin_inset Index idx
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 Encapsulated PostScript
18399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18402 (EPS, file extension
18403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18415 \begin_inset Index idx
18418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 Portable Document Format
18451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 (PDF, file extension
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18467 \begin_inset Index idx
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18485 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18486 result will not be scalable.
18487 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18501 \begin_layout Standard
18502 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18509 \begin_layout Subsection
18510 Grouping of Image Settings
18511 \begin_inset Index idx
18514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 Images ! Settings grouping
18523 \begin_layout Standard
18524 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18526 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18527 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18529 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18530 need to manually change each of them.
18534 \begin_layout Standard
18535 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18538 \begin_inset space ~
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18554 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset space ~
18564 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18565 and checking the name of the desired group.
18568 \begin_layout Section
18570 \begin_inset Index idx
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18590 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18593 arg "tabular-insert"
18598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18602 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18603 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18604 from the rest of the table.
18605 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18606 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18608 Here is an example table:
18611 \begin_layout Standard
18613 \begin_inset Tabular
18614 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18615 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18618 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 \begin_layout Subsection
18823 \begin_layout Standard
18824 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18827 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18831 This brings up the table dialog.
18832 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18833 cursor is placed currently.
18834 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18835 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18836 done on all of your selection.
18839 \begin_layout Standard
18840 In addition to the table dialog, the
18843 \begin_inset space ~
18848 helps you in setting table properties.
18849 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18852 \begin_layout Standard
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18861 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18862 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18863 current cell respectively.
18864 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18866 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18867 of text, see section
18868 \begin_inset space ~
18872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18874 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18881 \begin_layout Standard
18882 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18883 using the check box
18892 This will merge the cells to
18896 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18897 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18898 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18899 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18900 in the last row without the upper border:
18903 \begin_layout Standard
18905 \begin_inset Tabular
18906 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18907 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18909 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18922 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 \begin_layout Standard
19043 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19044 -arguments for the table.
19045 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19046 explained in the chapter
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19059 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19060 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19061 but are visible in the output.
19064 \begin_layout Standard
19065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19073 Most DVI-viewers are
19077 able to display rotations.
19085 \begin_layout Standard
19090 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19095 adds lines for all cell borders.
19098 \begin_layout Subsection
19100 \begin_inset Index idx
19103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19104 Tables ! Longtables
19110 \begin_inset Index idx
19113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 \begin_layout Standard
19123 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19126 \begin_inset space ~
19130 \begin_inset space ~
19139 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19140 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19143 \begin_layout Description
19148 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19149 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19150 except for the first page, if
19153 \begin_inset space ~
19161 \begin_layout Description
19165 \begin_inset space ~
19170 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19171 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19174 \begin_layout Description
19179 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19180 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19181 except for the last page, if
19184 \begin_inset space ~
19192 \begin_layout Description
19196 \begin_inset space ~
19201 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19202 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19205 \begin_layout Description
19206 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19207 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19213 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19224 \begin_layout Standard
19225 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19226 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19227 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19233 In this context, first means first in this order:
19236 \begin_inset space ~
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19253 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19256 \begin_layout Standard
19258 \begin_inset Tabular
19259 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19260 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19261 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19263 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19264 <row endfirsthead="true">
19265 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19271 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19276 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19295 <row endfirsthead="true">
19296 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19316 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <row endhead="true">
19329 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <row endhead="true">
19360 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <row endfoot="true">
19393 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19404 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19444 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20445 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <row endlastfoot="true">
21375 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 \begin_layout Subsection
21414 \begin_inset Index idx
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21426 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21433 \begin_layout Standard
21434 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21435 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21436 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21437 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21441 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21444 \begin_layout Standard
21445 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21446 for the column in the table dialog.
21447 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21448 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21452 \begin_layout Standard
21454 \begin_inset Tabular
21455 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21456 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21457 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21458 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21459 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 This is longer now.
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21661 This is longer now.
21666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21692 \begin_layout Standard
21693 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21694 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21700 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21706 Selection with the mouse or with
21710 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21711 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21712 the selection from outside the table.
21715 \begin_layout Section
21717 \begin_inset Index idx
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21736 \begin_layout Subsection
21740 \begin_layout Standard
21741 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21742 have a fixed location.
21744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21751 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21759 \begin_inset space ~
21764 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21765 too many notes on the current page.
21768 \begin_layout Standard
21769 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21770 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21771 and pages without text.
21772 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21773 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21774 Floats are therefore numbered.
21775 Referencing is described in section
21776 \begin_inset space ~
21780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21782 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21789 \begin_layout Standard
21790 To insert a float, use the menu
21792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21796 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21797 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21799 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21800 \begin_inset Index idx
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21810 paragraph within the float.
21811 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21812 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21813 left-clicking on the box label.
21814 A closed float box looks like this:
21815 \begin_inset Graphics
21816 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21821 – a gray button with a red label.
21824 \begin_layout Standard
21825 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21827 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21830 \begin_layout Subsection
21832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21834 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21839 \begin_inset Index idx
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 Floats ! Figure floats
21851 \begin_layout Standard
21853 \begin_inset space ~
21857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21859 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21863 was created using the menu
21865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21866 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21872 arg "float-insert figure"
21876 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21885 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21889 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21890 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21892 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21894 \begin_inset space ~
21902 arg "layout-paragraph"
21908 \begin_layout Standard
21909 \begin_inset Float figure
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 \begin_inset Graphics
21917 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21932 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21936 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21951 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21962 ) and refer to it using the menu
21964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21970 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21974 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21975 vague references like
21976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21983 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21984 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21994 For more about cross-references, see section
21995 \begin_inset space ~
21999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22001 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22008 \begin_layout Standard
22009 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22010 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22011 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22012 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22013 as described in section
22014 \begin_inset space ~
22018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22020 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22026 \begin_inset space ~
22030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22032 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22036 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22037 You can also set the images one below the other.
22039 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22045 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22052 reference "fig:Platypus"
22056 are the subfigures.
22059 \begin_layout Standard
22060 \begin_inset Float figure
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22070 \begin_inset Float figure
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22081 name "fig:Undefinable"
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 \begin_inset Graphics
22095 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22106 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22110 \begin_inset Float figure
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22121 name "fig:Platypus"
22133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 \begin_inset Graphics
22135 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22147 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22159 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22163 Two distorted images.
22176 \begin_layout Subsection
22178 \begin_inset Index idx
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 Floats ! Table floats
22190 \begin_layout Standard
22191 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22194 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22197 or the toolbar button
22200 arg "float-insert table"
22204 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22205 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22206 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22208 \begin_inset space ~
22212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22214 reference "tab:Table-float"
22221 \begin_layout Standard
22222 \begin_inset Float table
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22233 name "tab:Table-float"
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 \begin_inset Tabular
22248 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22249 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22403 \end{array}\right]$
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22445 \begin_layout Subsection
22447 \begin_inset Index idx
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22461 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22462 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22463 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22465 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22473 \begin_inset space ~
22481 \begin_layout Section
22483 \begin_inset Index idx
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 \begin_layout Standard
22497 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22499 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22500 \begin_inset space \space{}
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22509 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22515 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22516 and its alignment within the page.
22519 \begin_layout Standard
22521 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22531 height_special "totalheight"
22536 backgroundcolor "none"
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 This is a minipage.
22543 The text is set in an italic style.
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22549 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22550 another formatting.
22558 \begin_layout Standard
22559 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22562 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22566 as described in section
22567 \begin_inset space ~
22571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22573 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22578 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22584 \begin_layout Standard
22585 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22595 height_special "totalheight"
22600 backgroundcolor "none"
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22605 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22611 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22615 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22625 height_special "totalheight"
22630 backgroundcolor "none"
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22635 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22643 \begin_layout Standard
22644 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22650 \begin_layout Standard
22651 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22653 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22660 \begin_inset space ~
22668 \begin_layout Chapter
22669 Mathematical Formulas
22670 \begin_inset Index idx
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 \begin_inset Index idx
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22714 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22721 \begin_layout Standard
22722 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22727 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22730 \begin_layout Section
22732 \begin_inset Index idx
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 \begin_layout Standard
22745 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22758 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22760 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22761 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22762 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22770 \begin_layout Standard
22771 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22775 \begin_inset space ~
22780 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22783 \begin_layout Standard
22784 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22785 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22788 \begin_layout Standard
22789 This is a line with an inline formula
22790 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22797 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22798 paragraph, like this one:
22799 \begin_inset Formula
22806 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22809 \begin_layout Standard
22811 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22813 For example, typing
22814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22827 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22828 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22832 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22835 \begin_inset space ~
22843 \begin_layout Subsection
22844 Navigating in Formulas
22845 \begin_inset Index idx
22848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22857 \begin_layout Standard
22858 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22859 achieved with the arrow keys.
22861 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22862 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22867 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22868 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22872 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22876 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22879 \end{array}\right]$
22887 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22892 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22893 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22896 \begin_layout Standard
22901 , printed in this document as
22902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22906 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22913 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22914 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22915 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22920 For example, if you want
22921 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22929 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22939 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22943 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22948 , since in the latter case only the
22951 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22956 will be under the square root sign:
22957 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22963 \begin_layout Standard
22964 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22966 \begin_inset Formula
22968 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22977 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22978 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22981 \begin_layout Subsection
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22987 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22991 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22992 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22993 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22994 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22995 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22999 \begin_layout Subsection
23000 Exponents and Subscripts
23001 \begin_inset Index idx
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23011 \begin_inset Index idx
23014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23023 \begin_layout Standard
23024 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23027 arg "math-superscript"
23033 arg "math-subscript"
23036 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23038 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23041 , type in a formula
23044 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23054 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23060 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23064 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23070 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23076 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23085 , you have to use an extra
23089 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23090 For example, if you want
23091 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23097 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23103 Subscripts are similar: To get
23104 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23118 \begin_layout Subsection
23120 \begin_inset Index idx
23123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 \begin_layout Standard
23133 Create a fraction either with the command
23139 or by using the icon
23142 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23148 \begin_inset space ~
23154 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23155 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23156 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23161 To move back up, press
23166 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23167 \begin_inset Formula
23169 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23172 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23180 \begin_layout Subsection
23182 \begin_inset Index idx
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 \begin_layout Standard
23195 Roots can be created using the
23198 \begin_inset space ~
23206 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23212 arg "math-insert \\root"
23234 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23240 always produces a square root.
23243 \begin_layout Subsection
23244 Operators with Limits
23245 \begin_inset Index idx
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 \begin_inset Index idx
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23267 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23274 \begin_layout Standard
23276 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23280 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23283 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23284 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23285 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23286 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23287 The sum operator will automatically place its
23288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23295 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23297 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23301 \begin_inset Formula
23303 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23308 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23312 \begin_layout Standard
23313 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23315 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23316 behind the operator and using the menu
23318 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23319 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23321 \begin_inset space ~
23325 \begin_inset space ~
23339 \begin_layout Standard
23340 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23349 \begin_inset Index idx
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 \begin_inset Formula
23361 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23366 which will place the
23367 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23379 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23380 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23386 \begin_layout Standard
23387 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23394 Have a look at section
23395 \begin_inset space ~
23399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23401 reference "subsec:Functions"
23405 for an explanation of function macros.
23408 \begin_layout Subsection
23410 \begin_inset Index idx
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 \begin_layout Standard
23423 Most math symbols can be found in the
23426 \begin_inset space ~
23431 under one of several categories; including
23448 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23454 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23455 don't have to use the
23458 \begin_inset space ~
23463 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23465 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23468 \begin_layout Subsection
23470 \begin_inset Index idx
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 \begin_layout Standard
23483 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23489 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23495 \begin_inset space ~
23503 arg "math-insert \\space"
23507 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23508 For example, the sequence
23513 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23516 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23518 \begin_inset Graphics
23519 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23524 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23525 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23526 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23527 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23528 , because they are negative
23530 Here are two examples:
23533 \begin_layout Standard
23543 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23549 \begin_layout Standard
23559 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23565 \begin_layout Subsection
23567 \begin_inset Index idx
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23579 name "subsec:Functions"
23586 \begin_layout Standard
23590 \begin_inset space ~
23595 contains under the button
23598 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23601 a number of function macros, such as
23602 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23606 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23614 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23621 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23622 avoid confusions, because
23623 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23627 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23633 \begin_layout Standard
23634 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23636 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23640 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23646 \begin_layout Standard
23647 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23648 are placed, as described in section
23649 \begin_inset space ~
23653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23655 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23662 \begin_layout Subsection
23664 \begin_inset Index idx
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 \begin_layout Standard
23677 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23679 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23680 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23681 commands, for example, to enter
23682 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23685 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23686 Our example is entered by typing
23691 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23698 \begin_inset space ~
23702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23704 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23708 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23711 \begin_layout Standard
23712 \begin_inset Float table
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23723 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23727 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 \begin_inset Tabular
23738 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23739 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23740 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24324 \begin_layout Standard
24325 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24328 \begin_inset space ~
24336 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24339 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24343 \begin_layout Section
24344 Brackets and Delimiters
24345 \begin_inset Index idx
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 \begin_inset Index idx
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24367 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24374 \begin_layout Standard
24375 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24377 For some purposes, using just the keys
24382 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24383 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24384 toolbar delimiter icon
24387 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24391 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24392 \begin_inset Formula
24394 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24402 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24403 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24407 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24410 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24416 \begin_inset Formula
24418 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24426 \begin_layout Standard
24427 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24428 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24432 \begin_layout Standard
24433 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24434 left side and right side.
24435 If you use the option
24438 \begin_inset space ~
24443 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24444 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24446 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24451 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24452 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24455 \begin_layout Standard
24456 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24457 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24458 is to go inside the brackets.
24459 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24464 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24465 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24466 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24470 arg "math-delim ( )"
24476 \begin_layout Section
24477 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24478 \begin_inset Index idx
24481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 \begin_inset Index idx
24491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 \begin_inset Index idx
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24510 \begin_layout Standard
24511 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24515 \begin_inset space ~
24523 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24527 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24528 Here is an example:
24529 \begin_inset Formula
24531 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24540 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24541 \begin_inset space ~
24545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24547 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24552 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24553 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24554 This alignment is set in the box
24559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24608 for every column as default.
24609 For example, the sequence
24610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24621 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24622 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24623 corresponds to the relevant column.
24624 The result will look like this:
24625 \begin_inset Formula
24628 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24629 column & has & has\,right\\
24630 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24639 \begin_layout Standard
24640 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24643 arg "newline-insert newline"
24646 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24647 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24652 or the math toolbar.
24655 \begin_layout Standard
24656 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24657 It can be created with the menu
24659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24660 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24662 \begin_inset space ~
24674 Here is an example:
24675 \begin_inset Formula
24689 \begin_layout Standard
24690 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24693 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24696 arg "newline-insert newline"
24700 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24705 arg "newline-insert newline"
24708 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24716 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24717 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24718 A new row is created by every further entry of
24721 arg "newline-insert newline"
24725 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24726 Here is an example:
24727 \begin_inset Formula
24729 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24730 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24735 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24736 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24737 \begin_inset Formula
24739 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24747 \begin_layout Standard
24748 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24755 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24756 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24759 reference "eq:asquared"
24764 The other types are described in section
24765 \begin_inset space ~
24769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24771 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24778 \begin_layout Section
24779 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24780 \begin_inset Index idx
24783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24784 Math ! Formula numbering
24790 \begin_inset Index idx
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24794 Math ! Referencing formulas
24800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24802 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24809 \begin_layout Standard
24810 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24812 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24813 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24815 \begin_inset space ~
24819 \begin_inset space ~
24827 arg "math-number-toggle"
24831 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24832 within parentheses.
24833 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24834 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24835 the document class.
24836 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24837 separated by a dot:
24838 \begin_inset Formula
24848 arg "math-number-toggle"
24851 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24852 You can only number displayed formulas.
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24856 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24859 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24861 \begin_inset space ~
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24873 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24876 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24877 \begin_inset Formula
24880 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24886 To number all lines use the shortcut
24889 arg "math-number-toggle"
24895 \begin_layout Standard
24896 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24899 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24900 A label is inserted with the menu
24902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24911 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24912 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24913 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24925 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24926 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24927 We inserted in the following example the label
24928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24935 in the second line:
24936 \begin_inset Formula
24938 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24939 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24944 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24945 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24946 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24950 \begin_inset space ~
24958 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24962 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24963 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24964 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24965 as the formula number:
24968 \begin_layout Standard
24969 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24972 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24979 \begin_layout Standard
24980 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24981 's cross-reference box are described in section
24982 \begin_inset space ~
24986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24988 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24993 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25001 \begin_layout Section
25002 User defined math macros
25003 \begin_inset Index idx
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 \begin_layout Standard
25017 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25018 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25019 Math macros are explained in section
25022 \begin_inset space ~
25034 \begin_layout Section
25038 \begin_layout Subsection
25040 \begin_inset Index idx
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25053 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25054 To set a font in a formula, use the
25057 \begin_inset space ~
25065 arg "math-insert \\font"
25068 , or enter its command, listed in table
25069 \begin_inset space ~
25073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25075 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 \begin_inset Float table
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25094 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25098 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25108 \begin_inset Tabular
25109 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25110 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25111 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 \begin_layout Standard
25381 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25389 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25405 \begin_layout Standard
25406 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25407 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25412 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25413 space when you need a space in the box.
25414 Here is an example where
25415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25426 denotes the set of numbers:
25427 \begin_inset Formula
25429 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25439 You can, for example, put a character in
25448 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25452 \begin_inset Newline newline
25455 So it is better not to use this feature.
25458 \begin_layout Standard
25459 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25460 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25464 \begin_inset Newline newline
25467 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25473 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25474 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25487 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25494 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25496 \begin_inset space ~
25504 \begin_layout Subsection
25506 \begin_inset Index idx
25509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 \begin_layout Standard
25519 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25521 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25525 \begin_inset space ~
25529 \begin_inset space ~
25537 \begin_inset space ~
25545 arg "math-insert \\font"
25549 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25550 in black instead of blue.
25551 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25552 Here is an example:
25553 \begin_inset Formula
25556 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25557 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25566 \begin_layout Subsection
25568 \begin_inset Index idx
25571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 \begin_layout Standard
25581 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25582 automatically chosen in most situations.
25600 For most characters,
25608 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25609 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25614 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25615 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25616 thinks are appropriate.
25617 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25620 arg "math-insert \\style"
25624 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25625 For example, you can set
25626 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25629 , which is normally in
25638 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25642 The four styles are used in the following example:
25645 \begin_layout Standard
25646 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25650 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25654 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25658 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25664 \begin_layout Standard
25665 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25666 is set in a particular size with the menu
25668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25670 \begin_inset space ~
25675 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25676 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25677 will be adjusted to correspond.
25678 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25689 \begin_layout Standard
25693 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25699 \begin_layout Section
25700 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25702 \begin_inset Index idx
25705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 \begin_inset Index idx
25715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 \begin_layout Standard
25726 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25727 that are in common use.
25730 \begin_layout Subsection
25731 Enabling AMS-Support
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25736 the document by selecting the checkbox
25739 \begin_inset space ~
25743 \begin_inset space ~
25747 \begin_inset space ~
25754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25758 \begin_inset Index idx
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25762 Document ! Settings
25770 \begin_inset space ~
25776 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25777 -errors in formulas,
25778 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25781 \begin_layout Subsection
25783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25785 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25790 \begin_inset Index idx
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25802 \begin_layout Standard
25803 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25804 provides a selection of different formula types.
25806 allows you to choose between
25827 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25828 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25834 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25837 \begin_layout Chapter
25841 \begin_layout Section
25843 \begin_inset Index idx
25846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25855 name "sec:Cross-References"
25862 \begin_layout Standard
25863 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25864 's strengths is cross-references.
25865 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25867 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25868 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25869 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25872 \begin_layout Enumerate
25876 \begin_layout Enumerate
25877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25879 name "enu:Second-item"
25886 \begin_layout Enumerate
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25896 or by pressing the toolbar button
25903 A gray label box like this:
25904 \begin_inset Graphics
25905 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25910 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25912 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25947 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25948 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25964 \begin_layout Standard
25965 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25970 or the toolbar button
25973 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25977 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25978 \begin_inset Graphics
25979 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25984 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25986 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25999 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26003 \begin_layout Standard
26004 As an alternative to
26006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26009 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26014 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26015 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26017 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26029 \begin_layout Standard
26030 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26031 \begin_inset space ~
26035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26037 reference "enu:Second-item"
26044 \begin_layout Standard
26045 It is recommended to use a protected space
26049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 described in section
26051 \begin_inset space ~
26055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26057 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26066 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26067 line breaks between them.
26070 \begin_layout Standard
26071 There are six formats of cross-references:
26074 \begin_layout Description
26075 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26078 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26085 \begin_layout Description
26086 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26087 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26106 \begin_layout Description
26107 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26113 LatexCommand pageref
26114 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26121 \begin_layout Description
26123 \begin_inset space ~
26127 \begin_inset space ~
26130 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26132 LatexCommand vpageref
26133 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26138 \begin_inset Newline newline
26141 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26142 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26143 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26144 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26145 it prints “on the next page”.
26146 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26149 \begin_layout Description
26151 \begin_inset space ~
26155 \begin_inset space ~
26159 \begin_inset space ~
26162 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26165 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26170 \begin_inset Newline newline
26173 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26179 ; otherwise it behaves like
26183 \begin_inset space ~
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26196 \begin_layout Description
26198 \begin_inset space ~
26201 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26202 \begin_inset Newline newline
26206 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26214 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26224 \begin_inset Index idx
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26229 -packages ! prettyref
26235 \begin_inset Index idx
26238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26240 -packages ! refstyle
26251 \begin_inset Newline newline
26254 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26255 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26258 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26263 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26271 is the default and preferred because
26275 supports only English documents.
26276 The format is specified by using the command
26288 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26289 preamble of the document.
26290 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26303 ) can be done with this command
26304 \begin_inset Newline newline
26311 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26316 \begin_inset Newline newline
26319 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26321 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26323 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26330 \begin_layout Description
26332 \begin_inset space ~
26335 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26337 LatexCommand nameref
26338 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26345 \begin_layout Standard
26346 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26347 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26349 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26353 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26358 You can only use the style
26362 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26366 is always possible.
26369 \begin_layout Standard
26370 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26371 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26373 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26380 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26387 \begin_layout Standard
26388 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26392 \begin_inset space ~
26396 \begin_inset space ~
26401 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26402 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26410 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26411 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26414 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26420 \begin_layout Standard
26421 You can change labels at any time.
26422 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26423 do not need to think about this.
26426 \begin_layout Standard
26427 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26429 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 References are described in detail in the section
26435 \begin_inset space ~
26439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26449 \begin_inset space ~
26457 \begin_layout Section
26458 Table of Contents and other Listings
26459 \begin_inset Index idx
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26469 \begin_inset Index idx
26472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26488 \begin_layout Subsection
26490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26492 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26499 \begin_layout Standard
26500 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26503 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26505 \begin_inset space ~
26509 \begin_inset space ~
26515 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26517 If you click on it, the
26521 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26522 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26523 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26525 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26527 \begin_inset space ~
26532 that is described in section
26533 \begin_inset space ~
26537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26539 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26548 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26550 \begin_inset space ~
26554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26556 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26560 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26562 \begin_inset space ~
26566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26568 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26572 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26574 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26577 \begin_layout Subsection
26578 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26581 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26591 You can insert them via the
26593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26597 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26600 \begin_layout Section
26601 URLs and Hyperlinks
26602 \begin_inset Index idx
26605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26612 \begin_inset Index idx
26615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26624 \begin_layout Subsection
26626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26635 \begin_layout Standard
26636 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26638 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26644 \begin_layout Standard
26645 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26647 \begin_inset Flex URL
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 \begin_layout Standard
26661 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26667 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26671 \begin_layout Standard
26672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26689 \begin_layout Subsection
26691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26693 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26706 or with the toolbar button
26713 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26722 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26723 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26726 name "LyX's homepage"
26727 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26731 , an Email address like this:
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26734 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26735 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26740 , or a link to a file.
26743 \begin_layout Standard
26744 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26757 to the link target.
26760 \begin_layout Standard
26761 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26762 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26763 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26764 the text style dialog.
26765 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26771 name "LyX's homepage"
26772 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26784 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26791 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26793 \begin_inset Newline newline
26801 \begin_inset Newline newline
26808 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26811 \begin_layout Section
26813 \begin_inset Index idx
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26825 name "sec:Appendices"
26832 \begin_layout Standard
26833 Appendices are created with the menu
26835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 \begin_inset space ~
26841 \begin_inset space ~
26847 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26848 as the appendix part of the book.
26849 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26852 \begin_layout Standard
26853 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26854 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26855 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26856 and the subsection number.
26857 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26861 \begin_layout Standard
26863 \begin_inset space ~
26867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26869 reference "chap:Credits"
26874 \begin_inset space ~
26878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26880 reference "subsec:Export"
26887 \begin_layout Section
26889 \begin_inset Index idx
26892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26901 name "sec:Bibliography"
26908 \begin_layout Standard
26909 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26911 You can include a bibliography database,
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 Known under the name
26917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26920 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26930 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26931 manually, using the paragraph environment
26935 , which was described in section
26936 \begin_inset space ~
26940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26942 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26947 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26948 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26952 use a bibliography database.
26955 \begin_layout Subsection
26956 The Bibliography Environment
26959 \begin_layout Standard
26964 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26966 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26975 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26977 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26987 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26990 \begin_layout Standard
26991 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26996 or the toolbar button
26999 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27003 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27004 containing the available citations.
27005 Select one or more keys from the list and
27015 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27016 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27020 \begin_layout Standard
27021 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27022 entry with surrounding brackets.
27027 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27028 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27040 \begin_layout Standard
27044 Companion Second Edition
27047 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27049 key "latexcompanion"
27056 \begin_layout Standard
27057 The \SpecialChar LyX
27058 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27059 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27068 \begin_layout Standard
27069 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27072 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27074 \begin_inset space ~
27082 arg "layout-paragraph"
27086 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27089 \begin_layout Subsection
27090 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27092 \begin_inset Index idx
27095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27096 Bibliography ! Databases
27102 \begin_inset Index idx
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27115 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27122 \begin_layout Standard
27123 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27131 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27132 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27137 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27139 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27140 your working field in a database.
27141 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27142 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27143 list for that document.
27144 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27148 \begin_layout Standard
27149 The database is a text file with the file extension
27150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27161 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27162 The format is explained in
27163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27169 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27171 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27173 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27178 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27179 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27180 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27182 \begin_inset Flex URL
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27196 To use a database, use the menu
27198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27203 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27205 \begin_inset space ~
27211 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27212 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27219 Add bibliography to TOC
27221 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27226 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27227 in the document or just the cited references.
27230 \begin_layout Standard
27231 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27243 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27244 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27245 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27246 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27248 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27255 \begin_inset Newline newline
27259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27261 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27273 \begin_layout Standard
27274 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27277 \begin_layout Standard
27278 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27279 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27281 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27295 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27296 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27300 The following variants are possible:
27303 \begin_layout Description
27304 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27305 with other bibliography packages (e.
27306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27310 \begin_inset space \space{}
27317 ), only with the package
27321 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27325 \begin_layout Description
27326 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27327 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27328 with all bibliography packages, except
27333 \begin_layout Description
27334 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27339 , works with all bibliography packages
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27344 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27346 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27349 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27362 \begin_layout Standard
27363 When you select the option
27365 Sectioned bibliography
27369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27370 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27373 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27374 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27376 Customizing Bibliographies
27380 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27385 Additional Features
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27392 the two methods of creating them.
27393 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27394 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27395 We used the style file
27399 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27402 \begin_layout Subsection
27403 Bibliography layout
27404 \begin_inset Index idx
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27408 Bibliography ! Layout
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27418 For this feature you need to enable the option
27424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27428 \begin_inset Index idx
27431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27432 Document ! Settings
27442 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27443 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27444 style files as explained in
27445 the previous section.
27448 \begin_layout Standard
27449 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27450 the citation reference window.
27451 Here is an example where the text
27452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27456 \begin_inset space ~
27460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27463 appears after the reference:
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27471 key "latexcompanion"
27478 \begin_layout Section
27480 \begin_inset Index idx
27483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27504 \begin_inset space ~
27509 or the toolbar button
27516 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27517 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27518 by \SpecialChar LyX
27519 as the index entry.
27522 \begin_layout Standard
27523 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27526 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27528 \begin_inset space ~
27534 A light blue box labeled
27535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27546 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27547 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27551 \begin_layout Standard
27552 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27553 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27554 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27555 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27557 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27559 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27566 \begin_layout Subsection
27567 Grouping Index Entries
27568 \begin_inset Index idx
27571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27581 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27583 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27584 lists under the entry
27585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27593 First we create the entry
27594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27602 \begin_inset space ~
27606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27608 reference "subsec:Lists"
27613 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27614 \begin_inset space ~
27618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27620 reference "sec:Itemize"
27624 , we insert the command
27627 \begin_layout Standard
27633 \begin_layout Standard
27637 \begin_layout Standard
27643 \begin_layout Standard
27644 for the enumerated list in section
27645 \begin_inset space ~
27649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27651 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27658 \begin_layout Standard
27659 The exclamation mark
27660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27667 marks the grouping levels.
27668 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27669 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27670 If we don't have an index entry for
27671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27678 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27681 \begin_layout Subsection
27683 \begin_inset Index idx
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 Index ! Page ranges
27695 \begin_layout Standard
27696 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27698 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27699 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27700 an index entry in section
27701 \begin_inset space ~
27705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27707 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27714 \begin_layout Standard
27717 Paragraph environments|(
27720 \begin_layout Standard
27721 and another entry at the end of section
27722 \begin_inset space ~
27726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27728 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27735 \begin_layout Standard
27738 Paragraph environments|)
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27766 respectively start and end the index range.
27767 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27768 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27769 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27770 An example is the index entry
27771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27774 Document ! Settings
27775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27781 \begin_layout Subsection
27783 \begin_inset Index idx
27786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27787 Index ! Cross referencing
27795 \begin_layout Standard
27796 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27797 We referred for example in the index entry
27798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27806 \begin_inset space ~
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27812 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27816 ) to the index entry
27817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27824 in the same section using the entry
27827 \begin_layout Standard
27830 GIF|see{Image formats}
27833 \begin_layout Standard
27834 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27836 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27837 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27840 \begin_layout Subsection
27842 \begin_inset Index idx
27845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27846 Index ! Entry order
27854 \begin_layout Standard
27855 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27856 follow the rules for the index order.
27857 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27863 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27865 \begin_inset space ~
27869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27871 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27880 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27881 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27906 \begin_inset Index idx
27909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27910 Dummy entries ! maïs
27916 \begin_inset Index idx
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 Dummy entries ! maître
27926 \begin_inset Index idx
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27930 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27935 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27936 maïs, maison, maître.
27937 To achieve this, we use the command
27940 \begin_layout Standard
27943 previous entry@current entry
27946 \begin_layout Standard
27947 In our case we want to have
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27963 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27966 \begin_layout Standard
27972 \begin_layout Standard
27973 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27974 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27976 See the next subsection for an example.
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27980 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27992 to generate the index (see sec.
27993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28008 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28009 -package aeguill in sec.
28010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28016 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28020 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28021 -packages although all these index
28022 commands start with
28023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28036 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28041 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28056 \begin_layout Standard
28068 \begin_layout Subsection
28070 \begin_inset Index idx
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 Index ! Entry layout
28082 \begin_layout Standard
28083 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28084 \begin_inset Index idx
28087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28090 This is an italic dummy entry
28095 You can also format the page number using the character
28096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28103 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28104 -command without a backslash.
28105 We can write for example
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28111 italic page number:|textit
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 to get the page number in italic.
28116 \begin_inset Index idx
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28125 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28126 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28144 \begin_inset space ~
28150 Have a look at section
28151 \begin_inset space ~
28155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28157 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28161 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28178 to generate the index, see sec.
28179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28185 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28194 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28199 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28203 key "latexcompanion"
28215 \begin_layout Standard
28216 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28218 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28219 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28220 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28221 If so, put the following in the preamble
28224 \begin_layout Standard
28236 \begin_layout Standard
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28246 \begin_layout Standard
28247 in the index entry.
28248 \begin_inset Index idx
28251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28252 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28257 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28258 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28259 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28264 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28265 a bold font for all index entries.
28266 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28278 documentation for details,
28279 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28281 key "makeindex,xindy"
28288 \begin_layout Subsection
28290 \begin_inset Index idx
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28302 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 If the index generation program
28314 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28315 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28319 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28320 distribution, is used.
28324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28329 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28330 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28331 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28332 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28333 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28343 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28345 dialog, see section
28346 \begin_inset space ~
28350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28352 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28357 The available options are listed and explained in
28358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28360 key "makeindex,xindy"
28365 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28369 \begin_layout Standard
28370 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28371 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28379 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28380 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28383 \begin_layout Subsection
28387 \begin_layout Standard
28388 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28389 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28397 next to the standard index.
28399 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28400 that add this feature.
28407 \begin_inset Index idx
28410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 -packages ! splitidx
28417 package to generate multiple indexes.
28418 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28433 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28434 style, but it also includes
28435 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28436 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28444 \begin_layout Standard
28445 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28446 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28452 and select the option
28454 Use multiple Indexes
28461 already contains the standard index
28462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28470 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28471 also appear as a heading) to the
28475 input field and press the
28480 The new index now also appears in the list.
28481 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28482 label color to the new index.
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28486 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28496 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28497 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28498 are additional features:
28501 \begin_layout Itemize
28502 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28503 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28506 \begin_layout Itemize
28507 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28508 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28516 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28517 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28518 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28519 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28522 \begin_layout Section
28523 Nomenclature/Glossary
28524 \begin_inset Index idx
28527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28568 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28577 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28578 called nomenclature or glossary.
28581 \begin_layout Standard
28582 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28589 \begin_inset Index idx
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28594 -packages ! nomencl
28600 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28608 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28613 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28614 and then use the menu
28616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28622 \begin_inset space ~
28627 or the toolbar button
28630 arg "nomencl-insert"
28635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28646 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28651 The first is the term or
28655 that you wish to define.
28660 of the term or symbol.
28663 \begin_layout Standard
28664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28672 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28673 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28681 \begin_layout Subsection
28682 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28683 \begin_inset Index idx
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 Nomenclature ! Layout
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28700 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28707 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28715 \begin_inset Newline newline
28723 \begin_inset Newline newline
28729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28736 character starts/ends the formula.
28737 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28738 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28750 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28761 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28762 -syntax is given in section
28763 \begin_inset space ~
28767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28769 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28776 \begin_layout Standard
28780 \begin_inset space ~
28785 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28787 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28792 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28799 in this document is:
28800 \begin_inset Newline newline
28805 dummy entry for the character
28810 \begin_inset Newline newline
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28832 font use the command
28861 \begin_layout Standard
28862 If the characters |
28863 \begin_inset space \space{}
28867 \begin_inset space \space{}
28871 \begin_inset space \space{}
28875 \begin_inset space \space{}
28879 \begin_inset space \space{}
28882 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28883 a quote character in front of them.
28884 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28885 LatexCommand nomenclature
28886 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28887 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28894 \begin_layout Subsection
28895 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28896 \begin_inset Index idx
28899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28900 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28908 \begin_layout Standard
28909 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28910 -code of the symbol
28912 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28914 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28917 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28918 LatexCommand nomenclature
28920 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28927 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28931 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28932 LatexCommand nomenclature
28935 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28940 They will be sorted by
28941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28967 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28970 will be sorted before the
28974 since the character
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28982 is considered in sorting.
28985 \begin_layout Standard
28986 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28989 \begin_inset space ~
28994 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28995 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28997 For the example given, you can insert
29001 in this field for the
29002 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29009 will be located before
29010 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29031 \begin_layout Subsection
29032 Nomenclature Options
29033 \begin_inset Index idx
29036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29037 Nomenclature ! Options
29045 \begin_layout Standard
29050 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29051 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29054 \begin_layout Description
29055 refeq Appends the phrase
29056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29071 to every nomenclature entry, where
29077 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29080 \begin_layout Description
29081 refpage Appends the phrase
29082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29097 to every nomenclature entry, where
29103 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29106 \begin_layout Description
29107 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29110 \begin_layout Standard
29111 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29112 class options list in the
29114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29118 In this document the options
29125 \begin_layout Standard
29126 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29134 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29139 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29142 \begin_layout Description
29152 \begin_layout Description
29155 nomrefpage Like the
29162 \begin_layout Description
29165 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29174 \begin_layout Description
29178 \begin_inset space ~
29184 \begin_inset space ~
29189 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29201 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29202 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29206 \begin_layout Standard
29214 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29217 \begin_inset Newline newline
29224 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29229 \begin_inset Newline newline
29233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29248 by their translation.
29251 \begin_layout Subsection
29252 Printing the Nomenclature
29253 \begin_inset Index idx
29256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29257 Nomenclature ! Printing
29265 \begin_layout Standard
29266 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29269 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29285 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29286 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29287 You can choose between these settings:
29290 \begin_layout Description
29291 Default a space of 1
29292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29298 \begin_layout Description
29300 \begin_inset space ~
29304 \begin_inset space ~
29307 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29310 \begin_layout Description
29311 Custom custom space
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29315 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29324 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29332 For example, in order to change the name to
29336 , add the following line to the preamble:
29339 \begin_layout Standard
29347 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29350 \begin_layout Subsection
29351 Nomenclature Program
29352 \begin_inset Index idx
29355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29356 Nomenclature ! Program
29362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29364 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29377 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29378 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29380 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29385 by adding options, see section
29386 \begin_inset space ~
29390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29392 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29397 The available options are listed and explained in
29398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29400 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29407 \begin_layout Section
29409 \begin_inset Index idx
29412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29419 \begin_inset Index idx
29422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29423 Document ! Branches
29429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29431 name "sec:Branches"
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29439 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29440 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29441 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29442 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29445 \begin_layout Standard
29446 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29447 allows you to put text into branches.
29448 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29449 To create a branch, either select the menu
29451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29452 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29455 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29464 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29465 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29466 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29467 and whether the name of the branch should
29468 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29469 (see below for an example).
29470 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29471 to the name of the other) and to add
29472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29484 \begin_inset space ~
29487 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29488 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29491 \begin_layout Standard
29492 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29493 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29498 where you can choose a branch.
29499 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29503 \begin_layout Standard
29504 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29505 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29508 \begin_layout Standard
29509 \begin_inset Branch Question
29512 \begin_layout Standard
29513 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29521 \begin_layout Standard
29522 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29525 \begin_layout Standard
29526 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29534 \begin_layout Standard
29541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29545 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29546 Consider for example a file
29547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29554 which has the above branches.
29556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29563 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29587 branch were inactive,
29588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29603 branch was active, likewise
29604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29619 branch was active, and
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29623 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29627 if both branches were active.
29628 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29638 \begin_layout Standard
29639 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29640 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29641 definitions for each branch.
29642 For example you can define for the question branch
29646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29647 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29648 -syntax, see section
29649 \begin_inset space ~
29653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29655 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29667 \begin_layout Standard
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29687 \begin_layout Standard
29688 and for the answer branch
29691 \begin_layout Standard
29701 \begin_layout Standard
29711 \begin_layout Standard
29712 \begin_inset Branch Question
29715 \begin_layout Standard
29719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29748 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29783 \begin_layout Standard
29784 Now it is possible to use the
29788 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29795 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29798 commands to obtain conditional output.
29799 Here is an example formula where only the
29806 \begin_inset Formula
29808 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29816 \begin_layout Standard
29817 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29826 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29832 \begin_inset space \space{}
29835 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29837 For this advanced usage, see the
29842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29845 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29852 \begin_layout Section
29854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29856 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29861 \begin_inset Index idx
29864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29873 \begin_layout Standard
29876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29880 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29882 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29888 \begin_inset Index idx
29891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29893 -packages ! hyperref
29898 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29899 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29900 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29901 part of the document.
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29906 The header information in the dialog tab
29910 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29911 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29912 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29913 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29917 \begin_inset space ~
29921 \begin_inset space ~
29926 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29927 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29928 and author entries.
29932 \begin_inset space ~
29936 \begin_inset space ~
29940 \begin_inset space ~
29945 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29948 \begin_layout Standard
29949 You can specify in the dialog tab
29953 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29958 \begin_inset space ~
29962 \begin_inset space ~
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29971 option allows long links to be split;
29974 \begin_inset space ~
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset space ~
29995 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29998 \begin_inset space ~
30003 colors the different links.
30004 The default colors are:
30007 \begin_layout Labeling
30008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30013 for hyperlinks and URLs
30016 \begin_layout Labeling
30017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30025 \begin_layout Labeling
30026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 but you can change these in the field
30040 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30046 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30054 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30055 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30056 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30064 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30065 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30066 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30076 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30077 when opening the PDF.
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30082 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30086 1 will only display the sections.
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30090 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30091 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30097 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30107 \begin_layout Section
30109 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30113 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30120 \begin_layout Subsection
30123 \begin_inset Index idx
30126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30136 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 As \SpecialChar LyX
30145 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30146 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30147 commands and constructs,
30150 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30151 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30152 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30153 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30154 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30155 cannot support all packages and
30159 \begin_layout Standard
30160 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30161 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30162 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30166 Code box is created by the menu
30168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30175 or by the toolbar button
30188 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30199 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30201 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30202 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30209 , you can write the command part
30215 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30216 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30220 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30221 Code box behind the word.
30222 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30223 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30227 \begin_layout Standard
30228 \begin_inset Graphics
30229 filename clipart/ERT.png
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 This is a line with a
30246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30279 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30280 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30281 know that the command is finished.
30289 \begin_layout Subsection
30290 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30292 \begin_inset Argument 1
30295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30303 \begin_inset Index idx
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30316 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30323 \begin_layout Standard
30324 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30325 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30326 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30327 uses in the background.
30328 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30329 is based on commands, you can
30330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30338 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30339 any time if you know the right commands.
30340 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30341 is the end of the day.
30342 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30343 all caption labels bold.
30344 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30346 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30350 \begin_layout Standard
30351 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30353 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30355 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30367 \begin_layout Standard
30368 As result you find that the package
30373 \begin_inset Index idx
30376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 -packages ! caption
30384 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30389 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30393 \begin_inset space ~
30401 \begin_layout Standard
30406 usepackage[options]{package name}
30409 \begin_layout Standard
30410 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30411 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30412 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30413 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30417 In your case the package name is
30422 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30427 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30428 So you add the command
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30436 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30439 \begin_layout Standard
30440 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30445 For more commands provided by the
30449 package, have a look at its documentation,
30450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30467 For example if you use a
30471 class, you don't need the package
30475 , you can instead write
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30483 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30490 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30491 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30498 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30502 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30503 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30505 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30506 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30507 Code box as described in the previous
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30513 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30518 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30532 \begin_layout Standard
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 \begin_inset Note Note
30549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30558 \begin_layout Left Header
30559 \begin_inset Argument 1
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30582 \begin_inset Note Note
30585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30586 defines the header line as described below
30594 \begin_layout Center Header
30595 \begin_inset Argument 1
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30607 \begin_layout Right Header
30608 \begin_inset Argument 1
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 \begin_layout Left Footer
30633 \begin_inset Argument 1
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 \begin_layout Center Footer
30658 \begin_inset Argument 1
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 \begin_inset Newline newline
30677 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30683 \begin_layout Right Footer
30684 \begin_inset Argument 1
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 \begin_layout Section
30710 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30713 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30718 \begin_inset Index idx
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 Document ! Header/Footer line
30728 \begin_inset Index idx
30731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30745 \begin_inset space ~
30756 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30762 \begin_inset space ~
30768 As a second step add in the menu
30770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30778 Custom Header/Footerlines
30779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30783 This module offers the following 6
30784 \begin_inset space ~
30790 \begin_layout Description
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30796 \begin_inset space ~
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30808 \begin_inset space ~
30814 \begin_layout Description
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30820 \begin_inset space ~
30824 \begin_inset space ~
30828 \begin_inset space ~
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30839 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30843 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30844 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30846 \begin_inset space ~
30850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30852 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30856 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30859 \begin_layout Standard
30860 \begin_inset Float figure
30866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30869 \begin_inset Tabular
30870 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30871 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30872 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30873 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30874 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30894 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30923 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30938 The normal text on the page goes here.
30939 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30941 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30942 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31037 name "fig:Page-layout"
31041 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31072 is set to “Default”.
31073 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31082 \begin_layout Subsection
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31088 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31089 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31090 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31092 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31093 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31098 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31104 \begin_inset space ~
31112 \begin_layout Description
31115 thepage prints the current page number
31118 \begin_layout Description
31121 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31124 \begin_layout Description
31127 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31130 \begin_layout Description
31133 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31134 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31141 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31144 because it usually goes in a left header.
31147 \begin_layout Description
31150 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31151 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31153 It is normally used in the right header.
31156 \begin_layout Subsection
31157 Default header/footer
31160 \begin_layout Standard
31161 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31162 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31163 footer has the page number.
31164 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31165 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31166 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31169 \begin_inset space ~
31177 \begin_layout Subsection
31181 \begin_layout Standard
31182 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31183 Some pages are different.
31184 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31185 a new part or chapter in your book.
31186 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31187 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31188 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31192 Header and footer decoration line
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31196 By default, you get a 0.4
31197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31200 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31201 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31213 in the following way:
31216 \begin_layout Standard
31223 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31226 \begin_layout Standard
31227 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31236 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31243 \begin_layout Standard
31244 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31246 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31247 \begin_inset space ~
31251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31261 Several header/footer lines
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31266 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31267 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31269 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 \begin_inset space ~
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31313 headheight}{height}
31316 \begin_layout Standard
31317 where height is a size in standard units.
31318 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31319 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31320 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31321 logfile with the menu
31323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31329 \begin_inset space ~
31334 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31339 \begin_inset Index idx
31342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31344 -packages ! fancyhdr
31350 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31351 for your header/footer.
31354 \begin_layout Subsection
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31359 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31360 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31361 This example consists of the following definition:
31364 \begin_layout Description
31366 \begin_inset space ~
31375 , empty optional argument
31378 \begin_layout Description
31380 \begin_inset space ~
31383 Header empty, empty optional argument
31386 \begin_layout Description
31388 \begin_inset space ~
31397 in the optional argument
31400 \begin_layout Description
31402 \begin_inset space ~
31411 in the optional argument
31414 \begin_layout Description
31416 \begin_inset space ~
31429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31433 \begin_inset Newline newline
31437 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31444 in the optional argument
31447 \begin_layout Description
31449 \begin_inset space ~
31458 , empty optional argument
31461 \begin_layout Description
31464 headrulewidth set to 2
31465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31471 \begin_layout Standard
31472 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31473 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31488 \begin_layout Standard
31489 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31495 \begin_layout Standard
31499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31503 pagestyle{headings}
31509 \begin_inset Note Note
31512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 switches back to page style with the default headings
31521 \begin_layout Section
31522 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31525 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31530 \begin_inset Index idx
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31540 \begin_inset Index idx
31543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31554 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31555 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31556 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31559 \begin_layout Subsection
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31564 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31570 \begin_inset Index idx
31573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31575 -packages ! preview-latex
31580 (on some systems named simply
31585 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31587 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31593 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31595 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31603 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31604 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31605 -package are automatically
31606 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31610 \begin_layout Subsection
31614 \begin_layout Standard
31615 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31616 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31618 activate the option
31621 \begin_inset space ~
31628 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31634 \begin_inset space ~
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31641 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31648 \begin_inset space ~
31661 \begin_inset space ~
31666 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31669 \begin_layout Standard
31670 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31683 \begin_inset space ~
31691 \begin_layout Standard
31692 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31693 and when you finish
31697 \begin_layout Standard
31698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31706 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31707 generated by activating the option
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31716 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31724 \begin_layout Subsection
31725 Selected document parts
31728 \begin_layout Standard
31729 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31730 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31731 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31732 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31734 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31740 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31741 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31742 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31753 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31765 is explained in section
31767 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31772 \begin_inset space ~
31782 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31783 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31784 the final rotated boxes,
31785 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31786 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31788 Here is the result:
31791 \begin_layout Standard
31792 \begin_inset Preview
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31803 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31809 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31819 height_special "totalheight"
31824 backgroundcolor "none"
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31858 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31881 Previewing works also for colors.
31882 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31901 is explained in section
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31922 \begin_inset Preview
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31947 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31952 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 If \SpecialChar LyX
31980 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31981 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31982 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31983 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31984 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31985 the \SpecialChar TeX
31987 If \SpecialChar LyX
31988 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31989 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31991 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31992 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31993 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31996 \begin_layout Subsection
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32003 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32006 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32008 \begin_inset space ~
32013 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32015 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32017 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32018 's main window, then only this selection
32019 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32020 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32021 the source view window.
32026 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32027 ; but note that if you have
32028 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32030 not just the one which is open at the time.
32033 \begin_layout Section
32034 Advanced Find and Replace
32035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32037 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32042 \begin_inset Index idx
32045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32052 \begin_inset Index idx
32055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32064 \begin_layout Subsection
32068 \begin_layout Standard
32069 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32070 allows for searching of complex,
32071 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32073 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32074 The key-features are:
32077 \begin_layout Itemize
32078 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32079 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32080 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32084 \begin_layout Itemize
32085 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32086 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32087 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32088 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32091 \begin_layout Itemize
32092 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32093 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32094 outside of mathematics environments
32097 \begin_layout Itemize
32098 Search may be widened to a specific
32103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32107 \begin_inset space ~
32110 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32111 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32118 \begin_layout Itemize
32119 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32120 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32128 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32131 \begin_layout Subsection
32135 \begin_layout Standard
32136 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32151 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32154 ) or the toolbar button
32157 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32163 Advanced Find and Replace
32168 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32178 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32182 \begin_inset space ~
32187 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32190 arg "paragraph-break"
32194 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32195 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32199 arg "paragraph-break"
32202 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32206 searches backwards.
32209 \begin_layout Standard
32213 \begin_inset space ~
32218 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32227 \begin_inset space ~
32232 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32236 Searching for mathematics
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32240 Mathematical formulas, such as
32241 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32244 or something more complex like
32245 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32248 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32253 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32254 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32255 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32256 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32267 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32268 This is done by switching to the
32272 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32277 This way, entering in the
32284 \begin_layout Itemize
32285 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32286 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32289 \begin_layout Itemize
32290 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32291 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32294 \begin_layout Itemize
32295 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32296 of it only within section headings.
32297 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32298 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32302 \begin_layout Itemize
32303 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32304 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32311 \begin_layout Standard
32312 The entries made in the
32316 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32319 \begin_inset space ~
32325 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32329 button or alternatively press
32332 arg "paragraph-break"
32339 while the cursor is in the
32342 \begin_inset space ~
32350 \begin_layout Standard
32351 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32353 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32357 \begin_layout Itemize
32358 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32359 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32367 with its typewriter version
32368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32382 \begin_layout Itemize
32383 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32389 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32401 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32408 (you may want to enable the
32411 \begin_inset space ~
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32424 options and disable the
32432 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32440 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32441 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32445 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32448 , or occurrences of
32449 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32453 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32459 \begin_layout Subsection
32463 \begin_layout Standard
32464 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32469 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32473 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32482 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32488 This is done with the context menu
32490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32491 Insert Regular Expression
32493 while the cursor is in the
32498 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32499 expression matching rules
32503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32504 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32511 \begin_inset space ~
32514 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32515 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32521 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32522 same text in the document.
32523 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32524 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32527 \begin_layout Enumerate
32528 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32533 editor the fraction
32534 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32538 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32541 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32542 fractions with the given denominator.
32545 \begin_layout Enumerate
32546 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32558 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32563 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32564 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32565 Also, by inserting a
32566 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32569 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32570 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32574 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32575 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32576 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32579 , and referring back to them through
32580 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32584 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32588 For example, try searching with the regexp
32589 \begin_inset Newline newline
32592 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32595 \begin_inset Newline newline
32598 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32602 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32606 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32614 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32615 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32616 sub-expressions is absolute.
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32622 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32625 always refers to the first occurrence of
32626 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32629 in all entered regexps.
32637 \begin_layout Section
32639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32641 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32646 \begin_inset Index idx
32649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32660 has a built-in spell checker.
32663 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32670 key or the toolbar button
32673 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32676 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32677 beginning of the currently selected text.
32678 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32679 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32680 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32681 scrolled so that it is visible.
32682 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32683 n, if any could be found.
32684 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32688 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32689 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32692 \begin_layout Standard
32693 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32696 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32700 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32701 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32703 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32704 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32707 \begin_inset space ~
32715 arg "dialog-show character"
32718 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32720 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32725 can be downloaded from here:
32726 \begin_inset Newline newline
32730 \begin_inset Flex URL
32733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32741 \begin_inset Newline newline
32745 \begin_inset space ~
32748 files for each language.
32749 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32750 \begin_inset space ~
32753 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32754 's installation subfolder
32762 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32764 \begin_inset Newline newline
32767 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32768 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32769 but in most cases these are
32785 is the language code.
32788 \begin_layout Subsection
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32795 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32796 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32798 \begin_inset space ~
32801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32804 you can set the following things:
32807 \begin_layout Description
32809 \begin_inset space ~
32812 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32813 should use for spell checking.
32814 Depending on your platform,
32828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32829 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32830 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32845 \begin_layout Description
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32850 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32851 will always use the given language
32852 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32855 \begin_layout Description
32857 \begin_inset space ~
32860 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32866 \begin_inset space \space{}
32870 This should normally not be needed.
32873 \begin_layout Description
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32879 \begin_inset space ~
32882 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32894 \begin_layout Description
32896 \begin_inset space ~
32899 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32900 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32901 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32902 appear in a context menu.
32903 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32907 \begin_layout Description
32909 \begin_inset space ~
32913 \begin_inset space ~
32917 \begin_inset space ~
32920 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32924 \begin_layout Section
32926 \begin_inset Index idx
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32938 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32947 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32948 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32960 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32969 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32971 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32972 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32973 which are available for many languages.
32976 \begin_layout Standard
32977 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32978 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32982 \begin_layout Subsection
32983 Setting up the thesaurus
32986 \begin_layout Standard
32995 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32999 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33004 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33018 For instance, the US English files are named:
33021 \begin_layout Itemize
33025 \begin_layout Itemize
33029 \begin_layout Standard
33038 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33039 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33043 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33044 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33046 \begin_inset space ~
33051 ) to the path where they are installed.
33055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33056 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33057 ies, typical locations are
33063 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33067 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33071 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33074 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33080 LibreOffice-<Version>
33087 On the Mac, the default location is
33089 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33090 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33091 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33092 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33093 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33094 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33102 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33103 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33104 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33109 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33110 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33114 \begin_layout Itemize
33115 \begin_inset Flex URL
33118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33120 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33128 \begin_layout Standard
33129 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33130 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33133 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33134 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33136 \begin_inset space ~
33141 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33143 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33144 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33149 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33151 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33154 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33160 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33163 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33164 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33173 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33174 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33181 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33184 \begin_layout Subsection
33185 Using the thesaurus
33188 \begin_layout Standard
33189 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33194 or the toolbar button
33197 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33200 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33202 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33204 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33205 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33206 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33215 ), related terms (such as
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33227 ), compounds (such as
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33239 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33248 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33251 \begin_layout Standard
33252 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33253 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33257 \begin_layout Standard
33258 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33259 the dictionary, such as the above
33263 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33268 \begin_inset space \space{}
33271 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33272 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33273 For example, looking up the word form
33277 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33282 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33287 \begin_inset space \space{}
33298 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33299 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33300 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33303 \begin_layout Section
33305 \begin_inset Index idx
33308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33315 \begin_inset Index idx
33318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 Document ! Change Tracking
33325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33327 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33335 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33336 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33337 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33338 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33345 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33370 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33371 You can change the color in
33373 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33374 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33376 \begin_inset space ~
33380 \begin_inset space ~
33385 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33391 \begin_inset Index idx
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33395 Color ! Change tracking
33400 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33401 's status bar when the
33402 cursor is in changed text.
33403 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33406 arg "changes-merge"
33412 \begin_layout Standard
33413 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33415 \begin_inset Index idx
33418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33427 \begin_layout Standard
33428 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33435 \begin_inset Graphics
33436 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33444 \begin_layout Standard
33445 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33451 \begin_layout Standard
33452 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33455 \begin_layout Standard
33456 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 \begin_inset Tabular
33464 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33465 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33466 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33467 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 arg "changes-track"
33485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33496 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33516 arg "changes-output"
33524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33532 \begin_inset space ~
33535 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33541 \begin_inset space ~
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33575 Jumps to the next change
33581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33590 arg "change-accept"
33598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33609 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33629 arg "change-reject"
33637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33643 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33645 \begin_inset space ~
33648 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33650 \begin_inset space ~
33659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33668 arg "changes-merge"
33676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33684 \begin_inset space ~
33687 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 arg "all-changes-accept"
33715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33723 \begin_inset space ~
33726 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33728 \begin_inset space ~
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 arg "all-changes-reject"
33758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33769 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33775 \begin_inset space ~
33784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33808 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33844 \begin_inset space ~
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33888 \begin_layout Standard
33889 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33890 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33891 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33892 the next change after the current cursor position.
33893 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33894 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33895 step to the next change.
33896 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33900 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33901 to describe a change.
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33905 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33911 \begin_inset Index idx
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33916 -packages ! dvipost
33922 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33930 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33934 \begin_layout Section
33935 Comparison of Documents
33936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33938 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33943 \begin_inset Index idx
33946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 Comparison of documents
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33959 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33964 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33966 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33968 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33972 \begin_inset space ~
33976 \begin_inset space ~
33980 \begin_inset space ~
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34009 \begin_inset space ~
34014 enables the change tracking option
34017 \begin_inset space ~
34021 \begin_inset space ~
34025 \begin_inset space ~
34030 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34033 \begin_layout Section
34034 International Support
34035 \begin_inset Index idx
34038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34039 International support
34047 \begin_layout Standard
34048 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34049 with any language you want.
34050 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34051 up \SpecialChar LyX
34053 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34055 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34062 \begin_layout Standard
34063 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34064 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34071 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34078 \begin_layout Subsection
34080 \begin_inset Index idx
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34090 \begin_inset Index idx
34093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34094 Document ! Settings
34100 \begin_inset Index idx
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34104 Document ! Language
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34116 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34119 dialog lets you set
34121 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34131 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34141 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34142 For details about the different encoding options see section
34143 \begin_inset space ~
34147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34149 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34156 \begin_layout Subsection
34157 Keyboard mapping configuration
34158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34160 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 If you have for example a U.
34169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34172 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34173 can use an alternate keymap.
34174 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34179 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34180 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34181 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34184 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34185 \begin_inset space ~
34189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34191 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34196 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34197 which one you want to use.
34200 \begin_layout Standard
34201 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34202 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34203 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34207 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34208 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34209 one to support the characters you want.
34210 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34217 \begin_layout Chapter
34220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34222 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34230 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34231 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34232 topic inside the user's guide.
34235 \begin_layout Section
34237 \begin_inset Index idx
34240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34254 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34257 \begin_layout Subsection
34261 \begin_layout Standard
34262 Creates a new document.
34265 \begin_layout Subsection
34269 \begin_layout Standard
34270 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34271 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34272 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34275 \begin_layout Subsection
34279 \begin_layout Standard
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34289 Click there on a file to open it.
34292 \begin_layout Subsection
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 Closes the current document.
34300 \begin_layout Subsection
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34305 Closes all opened documents.
34308 \begin_layout Subsection
34312 \begin_layout Standard
34313 Saves the actual document.
34316 \begin_layout Subsection
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34321 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34324 \begin_layout Subsection
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 Saves all opened documents.
34332 \begin_layout Subsection
34336 \begin_layout Standard
34337 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34340 \begin_layout Subsection
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34346 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34347 It is described in the section
34349 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34354 Additional Features
34359 \begin_layout Subsection
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34365 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34367 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34368 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34373 When using the menu entry
34376 \begin_inset space ~
34381 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34385 \begin_inset space ~
34389 \begin_inset space ~
34393 \begin_inset space ~
34398 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34399 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34402 \begin_layout Subsection
34404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34406 name "subsec:Export"
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34414 You can export your document to various file formats.
34415 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34417 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34418 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34419 during its configuration.
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34425 \begin_inset space ~
34429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34431 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34438 \begin_layout Description
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34447 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34452 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34453 \begin_inset Newline newline
34456 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34457 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34461 \begin_layout Description
34462 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34468 \begin_layout Description
34470 \begin_inset space ~
34473 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34479 \begin_layout Description
34480 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 's native DVI-format.
34482 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34483 files paths or file names in your document.
34485 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34492 \begin_layout Description
34493 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34494 in files paths or file names
34497 \begin_layout Description
34499 \begin_inset space ~
34506 ) DVI-format using the program
34508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34511 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34515 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34531 \begin_layout Description
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34536 (cropped) the same as
34540 but with cropped page margins.
34543 \begin_layout Description
34545 \begin_inset space ~
34548 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34552 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34557 \begin_layout Description
34561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34577 \begin_layout Description
34579 \begin_inset space ~
34583 \begin_inset space ~
34586 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34590 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34598 \begin_layout Description
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34611 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34612 source that is compilable with the program
34614 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34618 \begin_layout Description
34622 \begin_inset space ~
34627 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34628 source, additionally all images used in the document
34629 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34633 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34636 \begin_layout Description
34640 \begin_inset space ~
34645 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34646 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34647 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34655 \begin_layout Description
34659 \begin_inset space ~
34668 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34669 source that is compilable with the program
34675 \begin_layout Description
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34681 \begin_inset space ~
34688 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34689 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34695 \begin_layout Description
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34700 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34701 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34707 \begin_inset space \space{}
34712 \begin_inset space ~
34716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34731 represent the version number)
34734 \begin_layout Description
34736 \begin_inset space ~
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34743 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34744 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34745 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34749 \begin_layout Description
34750 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34751 's internal XHTML engine
34754 \begin_layout Description
34755 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34760 \begin_layout Description
34761 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34763 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34766 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34770 \begin_layout Description
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34775 (cropped) the same as
34778 \begin_inset space ~
34783 but with cropped page margins
34786 \begin_layout Description
34790 \begin_inset space ~
34795 PDF-format using the program
34799 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34802 \begin_layout Description
34806 \begin_inset space ~
34810 \begin_inset space ~
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34823 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34828 \begin_inset space \space{}
34831 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34835 \begin_layout Description
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34844 PDF-format using the program
34846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34849 , produces PDF-files directly
34852 \begin_layout Description
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34861 PDF-format using the program
34865 , produces PDF-files directly
34868 \begin_layout Description
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34877 PDF-format using the program
34881 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34884 \begin_layout Description
34888 \begin_inset space ~
34893 PDF-format using the program
34898 , produces PDF-files directly
34901 \begin_layout Description
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34913 \begin_layout Description
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34926 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34927 and then exported as text using the program
34932 \begin_layout Description
34937 PostScript format using the program
34942 \begin_layout Description
34943 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34944 source and also code in the statistical programming
34958 it is possible to use
34962 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34966 \begin_layout Standard
34967 If one of the menu entries
34974 \begin_inset space ~
34983 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34985 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34993 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34998 \begin_inset Index idx
35001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35002 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35011 \begin_layout Subsection
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35016 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35017 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35026 reference "sec:Paths"
35031 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35040 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35041 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35042 's preferences as described in section
35043 \begin_inset space ~
35047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35049 reference "subsec:Converters"
35056 \begin_layout Subsection
35057 New and Close Window
35060 \begin_layout Standard
35061 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35065 \begin_layout Subsection
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35073 \begin_layout Section
35075 \begin_inset Index idx
35078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35087 \begin_layout Subsection
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35092 Described in section
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35099 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35106 \begin_layout Subsection
35107 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35110 \begin_layout Standard
35111 Described in section
35112 \begin_inset space ~
35116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35118 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35125 \begin_layout Subsection
35129 \begin_layout Standard
35130 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35131 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35134 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 Selects the whole document.
35142 \begin_layout Subsection
35143 Find & Replace (Quick)
35146 \begin_layout Standard
35147 Described in section
35148 \begin_inset space ~
35152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35154 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35161 \begin_layout Subsection
35162 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 Described in section
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35173 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35180 \begin_layout Subsection
35181 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35189 \begin_layout Subsection
35193 \begin_layout Standard
35194 Described in section
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35201 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35208 \begin_layout Subsection
35210 \begin_inset Index idx
35213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 Paragraph ! Settings
35222 \begin_layout Standard
35223 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35224 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35228 \begin_layout Standard
35229 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35230 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35237 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35247 \begin_layout Subsection
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35252 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35253 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35254 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35259 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35261 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35262 The properties of tables are described in section
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35269 reference "sec:Tables"
35273 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35280 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35287 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35291 \begin_layout Standard
35292 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35294 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35295 \begin_inset space ~
35299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35301 reference "sec:Nesting"
35306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35308 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35315 \begin_layout Subsection
35318 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35321 \begin_layout Standard
35322 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35323 nts of the same type.
35325 \begin_inset space ~
35329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35331 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35335 for an explanation.
35338 \begin_layout Section
35340 \begin_inset Index idx
35343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35352 \begin_layout Standard
35353 At the bottom of the
35357 menu the opened documents are listed.
35360 \begin_layout Subsection
35361 Open/Close all Insets
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35368 \begin_layout Subsection
35369 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35372 \begin_layout Standard
35373 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35376 \begin_layout Standard
35377 Math macros are described in the
35384 \begin_layout Subsection
35388 \begin_layout Standard
35389 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35396 reference "sec:Navigating"
35401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35403 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35410 \begin_layout Subsection
35414 \begin_layout Standard
35415 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35417 \begin_inset space ~
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35423 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35430 \begin_layout Subsection
35434 \begin_layout Standard
35435 Opens a window showing console messages.
35436 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35441 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35442 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35443 is processing the document.
35446 \begin_layout Subsection
35448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35450 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35455 \begin_inset Index idx
35458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35469 All toolbars and the
35472 \begin_inset space ~
35477 can be turned on and off.
35482 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35511 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35515 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35527 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35531 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35532 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35533 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35534 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35535 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35540 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35541 \begin_inset space ~
35545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35547 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35554 \begin_layout Subsection
35558 \begin_layout Standard
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35570 \begin_inset space ~
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35578 \begin_inset space ~
35582 \begin_inset space ~
35587 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35588 's main window vertically while
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35616 will split it horizontally.
35617 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35618 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35619 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35620 three or more documents at the same time.
35621 To close a split view, use the menu
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35628 \begin_inset space ~
35636 \begin_layout Subsection
35640 \begin_layout Standard
35641 Closes a split view.
35644 \begin_layout Subsection
35648 \begin_layout Standard
35649 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35650 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35651 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35652 's main window fullscreen.
35653 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35654 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35657 \begin_layout Section
35659 \begin_inset Index idx
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35683 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35694 \begin_layout Subsection
35696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35698 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35706 Here you can insert the following characters:
35709 \begin_layout Description
35714 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35717 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35718 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35719 -packages you have installed.
35720 You can get a complete display by checking
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35729 \begin_inset Newline newline
35733 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35741 Not all characters will be visible in the
35745 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35753 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35757 ) can display every character.
35765 \begin_layout Description
35766 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35770 \begin_layout Description
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35776 \begin_inset space ~
35779 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35780 \begin_inset space ~
35784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35786 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35793 \begin_layout Description
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35798 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35808 \begin_layout Description
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35813 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35823 \begin_layout Description
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35828 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35832 \begin_layout Description
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35837 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35841 \begin_layout Description
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35846 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35852 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35858 \begin_layout Description
35860 \begin_inset space ~
35863 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 \begin_layout Description
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35873 \begin_inset Index idx
35876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35883 \begin_inset Index idx
35886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35887 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35892 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35893 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35895 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35901 \begin_inset Index idx
35904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35912 \begin_inset Newline newline
35915 More information about this feature can be found in the
35921 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35927 \begin_layout Subsection
35931 \begin_layout Standard
35932 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35935 \begin_layout Description
35936 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35937 \begin_inset script superscript
35939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35948 \begin_layout Description
35949 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35950 \begin_inset script subscript
35952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35961 \begin_layout Description
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35966 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35973 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35980 \begin_layout Description
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35985 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35992 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
35999 \begin_layout Description
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36004 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36011 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36018 \begin_layout Description
36020 \begin_inset space ~
36023 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36029 \begin_inset space \space{}
36032 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36033 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36042 To insert a fraction use the command
36047 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36051 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36060 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36067 \begin_layout Description
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36072 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36079 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36086 \begin_layout Description
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36091 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36098 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36105 \begin_layout Description
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36110 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36117 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36124 \begin_layout Description
36125 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36132 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36139 \begin_layout Description
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36144 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36151 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36158 \begin_layout Description
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36163 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36170 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36177 \begin_layout Description
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36186 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36187 \begin_inset space ~
36191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36193 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36200 \begin_layout Description
36202 \begin_inset space ~
36205 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36206 as described in section
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36213 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36220 \begin_layout Description
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36232 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36239 \begin_layout Description
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36244 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36245 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36253 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36260 \begin_layout Description
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36265 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36266 \begin_inset space ~
36270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36272 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36279 \begin_layout Description
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36288 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36295 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36302 \begin_layout Subsection
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36311 \begin_inset space ~
36332 are described in section
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36339 reference "sec:toc"
36348 is described in section
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36355 reference "sec:Index"
36363 is described in section
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36370 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36376 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36379 is described in section
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36386 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36393 \begin_layout Subsection
36397 \begin_layout Standard
36398 To insert floats, as described in section
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36405 reference "sec:Floats"
36409 and in detail the chapter
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36424 \begin_layout Subsection
36428 \begin_layout Standard
36429 To insert notes, described in section
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36436 reference "sec:Notes"
36443 \begin_layout Subsection
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36450 Branches are described in section
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36457 reference "sec:Branches"
36464 \begin_layout Subsection
36468 \begin_layout Standard
36469 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36470 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36472 An example is the document class
36473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36480 with three custom insets.
36483 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36487 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36493 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36496 \begin_layout Subsection
36498 \begin_inset Index idx
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36513 For more information see chapter
36515 External Document Parts
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36524 \begin_layout Subsection
36526 \begin_inset Index idx
36529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36538 \begin_layout Standard
36539 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36540 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36547 \begin_inset space ~
36555 \begin_layout Subsection
36559 \begin_layout Standard
36564 dialog as described in section
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36578 \begin_layout Subsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36587 as described in section
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36594 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36601 \begin_layout Subsection
36605 \begin_layout Standard
36610 as described in section
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36617 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36624 \begin_layout Subsection
36626 \begin_inset Index idx
36629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36636 \begin_inset Index idx
36639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36640 Longtables ! Caption
36648 \begin_layout Standard
36649 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36650 Floats are described in section
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36657 reference "sec:Floats"
36661 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36668 \begin_inset space ~
36676 \begin_layout Subsection
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36688 reference "sec:Index"
36695 \begin_layout Subsection
36699 \begin_layout Standard
36700 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36707 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36714 \begin_layout Subsection
36718 \begin_layout Standard
36719 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36720 Tables are described in section
36721 \begin_inset space ~
36725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36727 reference "sec:Tables"
36731 and in detail in the chapter
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36746 \begin_layout Subsection
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36756 Graphics are described in section
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36763 reference "sec:Graphics"
36770 \begin_layout Subsection
36774 \begin_layout Standard
36775 Inserts a URL as described in section
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36782 reference "subsec:URLs"
36789 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36801 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36808 \begin_layout Subsection
36812 \begin_layout Standard
36813 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36814 \begin_inset space ~
36818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36820 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36827 \begin_layout Subsection
36831 \begin_layout Standard
36832 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36833 \begin_inset space ~
36837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36839 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36846 \begin_layout Subsection
36850 \begin_layout Standard
36851 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36852 title or caption of a float.
36853 Inserts a short title as described in section
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36860 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36867 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36874 Code box as described in section
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36881 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36888 \begin_layout Subsection
36890 \begin_inset Index idx
36893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 Inserts a program listings box.
36904 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36906 Program Code Listings
36911 \begin_inset space ~
36919 \begin_layout Subsection
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36924 Inserts the actual date.
36925 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36929 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36937 \begin_inset space ~
36945 \begin_layout Subsection
36949 \begin_layout Standard
36950 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36957 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36964 \begin_layout Section
36966 \begin_inset Index idx
36969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36978 \begin_layout Standard
36979 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36983 of the current document.
36984 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36987 \begin_layout Subsection
36991 \begin_layout Standard
36992 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36993 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36994 to jump, for example, between section
36995 \begin_inset space ~
36999 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37003 2.5 and use the submenu
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37010 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37023 \begin_inset space ~
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37033 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37037 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37043 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37046 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37054 \begin_inset space ~
37059 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37067 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37079 \begin_layout Subsection
37083 \begin_layout Standard
37084 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37085 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37086 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37102 \begin_layout Subsection
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37110 The \SpecialChar LyX
37111 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37126 manual for a detailed description.
37129 \begin_layout Section
37131 \begin_inset Index idx
37134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37143 \begin_layout Subsection
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 Change Tracking is described in section
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37155 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37170 \begin_layout Standard
37171 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37172 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37173 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37175 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37176 to the clipboard or update the view.
37177 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37181 \begin_layout Subsection
37182 Start Appendix Here
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37186 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37187 as described in section
37188 \begin_inset space ~
37192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37194 reference "sec:Appendices"
37201 \begin_layout Subsection
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37210 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37211 default output format for the document (menu
37213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37215 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37233 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37237 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37241 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37246 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37251 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37269 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37273 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37274 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37277 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37279 \begin_inset space ~
37282 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37287 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37297 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37302 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37303 when it is first configured.
37304 The default output format is
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37315 \begin_layout Subsection
37316 View (Other Formats)
37319 \begin_layout Standard
37320 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37321 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37322 actual document with an external program.
37323 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37324 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37325 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37327 All possible formats are listed in section
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37334 reference "subsec:Export"
37339 You should at least see the menu entry
37344 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37346 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37354 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37359 \begin_inset Index idx
37362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37363 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37372 \begin_layout Standard
37373 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37374 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37377 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37382 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37387 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37397 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37402 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37403 when it is first configured.
37406 \begin_layout Subsection
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_layout Standard
37415 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37416 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37419 \begin_layout Subsection
37420 Update (Other Formats)
37423 \begin_layout Standard
37424 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37425 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37428 \begin_layout Subsection
37429 View Master Document
37432 \begin_layout Standard
37433 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37449 \begin_inset space ~
37454 manual for more information on this topic).
37455 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37456 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37469 generates the output of the whole book, while
37473 will just output the chapter alone.
37476 \begin_layout Standard
37477 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37478 in the document settings (menu
37480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37481 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37482 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37500 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37504 ) or in the preferences (menu
37506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37507 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37509 \begin_inset space ~
37512 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37517 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37519 \begin_inset space ~
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_inset space ~
37533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37535 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37542 \begin_layout Subsection
37543 Update Master Document
37546 \begin_layout Standard
37547 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37568 manual for more information on this topic).
37569 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37570 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37573 \begin_layout Standard
37574 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37575 in the document settings (menu
37577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37578 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37579 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37581 \begin_inset space ~
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37597 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37601 ) or in the preferences (menu
37603 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37604 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37609 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37614 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37632 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37639 \begin_layout Subsection
37643 \begin_layout Standard
37644 Un/compresses the current document.
37647 \begin_layout Subsection
37651 \begin_layout Standard
37652 The document settings are described in appendix
37653 \begin_inset space ~
37657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37659 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37666 \begin_layout Section
37668 \begin_inset Index idx
37671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37680 \begin_layout Subsection
37684 \begin_layout Standard
37685 Spell checking is explained in section
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37699 \begin_layout Subsection
37703 \begin_layout Standard
37704 The thesaurus is described in section
37705 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37711 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37718 \begin_layout Subsection
37720 \begin_inset Index idx
37723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37730 \begin_inset Index idx
37733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37744 the highlighted document part.
37747 \begin_layout Subsection
37753 \begin_inset Index idx
37756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37757 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 Generates with the help of the program
37769 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37772 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37773 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37774 This feature is not available on Windows.
37777 \begin_layout Subsection
37783 \begin_inset Index idx
37786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37796 \begin_layout Standard
37797 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37807 to see the full filename paths.
37810 \begin_layout Subsection
37812 \begin_inset Index idx
37815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37826 files as described in section
37827 \begin_inset space ~
37831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37833 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37840 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 \begin_inset Index idx
37845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 \begin_inset Index idx
37879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37880 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37890 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37891 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37892 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37893 -packages and programs it needs; see
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37908 \begin_layout Subsection
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37917 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37918 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37924 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37931 \begin_layout Section
37933 \begin_inset Index idx
37936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37946 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37947 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37949 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37963 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37964 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37965 packages and classes found
37966 by \SpecialChar LyX
37968 \begin_inset space ~
37972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37974 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37981 \begin_layout Standard
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37990 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37995 \begin_layout Section
37997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37999 name "sec:Toolbars"
38006 \begin_layout Standard
38007 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38014 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38022 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38023 This is described in the
38025 Additional Features
38030 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 \begin_inset Graphics
38046 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38079 \begin_inset Note Note
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38083 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38088 manual for more information.
38096 \begin_layout Standard
38097 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38103 \begin_layout Standard
38104 \begin_inset Tabular
38105 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38106 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38107 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 \begin_inset Graphics
38115 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38129 pull-down box for the environments
38142 \begin_layout Standard
38143 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38149 \begin_layout Standard
38151 \begin_inset Tabular
38152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38153 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38154 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38155 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38209 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38239 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38255 arg "dialog-show print"
38263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38285 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38299 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38329 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38389 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38449 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38505 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38519 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38562 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38590 Emphasize text, function of the
38592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38594 \begin_inset space ~
38597 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 Set text to noun style, function of the
38629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38634 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38652 arg "textstyle-apply"
38660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38664 Format text using the current settings in the
38666 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38671 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38704 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38724 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38752 arg "tabular-insert"
38760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38794 Toggle outline window on/off,
38796 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38824 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38851 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38864 \begin_layout Subsection
38866 \begin_inset Index idx
38869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 \begin_layout Standard
38879 \begin_inset Graphics
38880 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38888 \begin_layout Standard
38889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38895 \begin_layout Standard
38896 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38900 \begin_layout Standard
38901 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38907 \begin_layout Standard
38908 \begin_inset Tabular
38909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38910 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38911 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38912 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 arg "layout Enumerate"
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38976 arg "layout Itemize"
38984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39030 arg "layout Description"
39038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 arg "depth-increment"
39065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39071 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39073 \begin_inset space ~
39077 \begin_inset space ~
39086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 arg "depth-decrement"
39103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39109 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39111 \begin_inset space ~
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 arg "float-insert figure"
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39148 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39155 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39164 arg "float-insert table"
39172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39179 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39225 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 arg "nomencl-insert"
39327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 arg "footnote-insert"
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39432 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39452 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39561 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39612 arg "dialog-show character"
39620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39631 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39647 arg "layout-paragraph"
39655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39681 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39709 \begin_layout Subsection
39710 View/Update Toolbar
39711 \begin_inset Index idx
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39715 Toolbar ! View / Update
39723 \begin_layout Standard
39724 \begin_inset Graphics
39725 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39732 \begin_layout Standard
39733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39740 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39744 \begin_layout Standard
39745 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39751 \begin_layout Standard
39752 \begin_inset Tabular
39753 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39754 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39756 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39796 arg "buffer-update"
39804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39826 arg "master-buffer-view"
39834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39842 \begin_inset space ~
39851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39860 arg "master-buffer-update"
39868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39876 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39898 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39913 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39914 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39915 Synchronize with Output
39921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 \begin_inset Graphics
39927 filename ../images/view-others.png
39929 groupId toolbarbuttons
39940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39947 View (Other Formats)
39953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 \begin_inset Graphics
39959 filename ../images/update-others.png
39961 groupId toolbarbuttons
39970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39977 Update (Other Formats)
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39991 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39995 \begin_layout Subsection
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40001 \begin_inset space ~
40005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40007 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40011 , the table toolbar
40012 \begin_inset Index idx
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 \begin_inset space ~
40029 manual and the math macro toolbar
40030 \begin_inset Index idx
40033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40046 \begin_layout Chapter
40047 The Document Settings
40048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40050 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40055 \begin_inset Index idx
40058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40059 Document ! Settings
40067 \begin_layout Standard
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40076 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40077 is called with the menu
40079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40083 You can save your document settings as default with the
40085 Save as Document Defaults
40087 button in any dialog.
40088 This will create a template named
40092 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40093 when you create a new document without
40097 \begin_layout Standard
40102 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40103 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40106 \begin_layout Standard
40107 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40108 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40109 to find the one you are looking for.
40110 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40111 the submenus of the dialog.
40113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40117 \begin_inset space \space{}
40121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40128 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40129 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40130 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40133 \begin_layout Section
40137 \begin_layout Standard
40138 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40140 Document classes are described in section
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40147 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40155 \begin_layout Standard
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40164 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40169 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40170 as a layout for a document class.
40171 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40173 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 Some classes use special class options by default.
40184 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40188 and you can decide to use them or not.
40189 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40190 recommended you leave them untouched.
40195 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40196 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40201 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40203 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40210 \begin_inset Newline newline
40215 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40218 \begin_inset Newline newline
40221 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40222 distribution, see section
40227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40229 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40241 \begin_layout Standard
40246 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40247 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40248 in the background if the child document
40249 is opened without its master.
40250 This way child documents are always compilable.
40251 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_layout Standard
40267 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40278 \begin_inset Index idx
40281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40283 -packages ! prettyref
40289 \begin_inset Index idx
40292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 -packages ! refstyle
40299 for cross-references, see section
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40306 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40313 \begin_layout Section
40317 \begin_layout Standard
40318 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40319 Please refer to the section
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40335 manual for details.
40338 \begin_layout Section
40342 \begin_layout Standard
40343 Modules are explained in section
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40350 reference "subsec:Modules"
40357 \begin_layout Section
40361 \begin_layout Standard
40363 \begin_inset space ~
40367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40369 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40376 \begin_layout Section
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 The document font settings are described in section
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40388 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40395 \begin_layout Section
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40400 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40417 and whether it should be a
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40425 can also be specified here.
40428 \begin_layout Standard
40429 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40430 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40431 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40433 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40436 \begin_layout Standard
40439 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40442 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40443 justifies the text on screen.
40444 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40448 \begin_layout Section
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 This dialog is described in sections
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40467 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40474 \begin_layout Section
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40479 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40486 reference "subsec:Margins"
40493 \begin_layout Section
40495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40497 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40502 \begin_inset Index idx
40505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 Language ! Encoding
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40516 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40517 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40519 is always encoded in utf8).
40520 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40521 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40522 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40523 -command is not known for
40524 a particular character).
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40528 If you use the option
40533 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40534 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40535 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40537 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40538 exactly one encoding.
40539 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40544 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40545 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40546 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40547 installation supports Unicode), choose
40548 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40549 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40550 is quite incomplete, so
40551 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40556 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40557 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40558 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40559 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40560 -commands is not used, because all
40561 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40562 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40563 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40564 , two new alternative engines
40565 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40567 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40569 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40605 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40609 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40621 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40632 The possible settings are:
40635 \begin_layout Description
40636 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40638 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40639 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40649 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40656 \begin_layout Description
40657 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40658 format you will use.
40659 In many cases this will be
40664 \begin_inset Index idx
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40675 If the newer package
40680 \begin_inset Index idx
40683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40685 -packages ! polyglossia
40690 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40691 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40692 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40694 this package will be used instead of
40701 \begin_layout Description
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40714 would be more appropriate.
40717 \begin_layout Description
40718 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40719 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40723 (for German texts), type in
40726 \begin_inset Newline newline
40731 usepackage{ngerman}
40734 \begin_layout Description
40735 None will not use a language package.
40736 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40743 \begin_layout Description
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40760 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40766 \begin_inset Index idx
40769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 -packages ! inputenc
40777 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40778 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40779 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40783 \begin_layout Description
40784 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40786 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40787 commands, which may result in a big
40788 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40789 -commands are needed.
40792 \begin_layout Description
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40801 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40804 \begin_layout Description
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40816 \begin_layout Description
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40821 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40824 \begin_layout Description
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40833 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40834 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40837 \begin_layout Description
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40846 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40850 \begin_layout Description
40852 \begin_inset space ~
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40859 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40860 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40863 \begin_layout Description
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40869 \begin_inset space ~
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40876 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40896 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40897 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40900 \begin_layout Description
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40909 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40910 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40911 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40912 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_layout Description
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40932 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40933 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40934 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40936 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40947 \begin_layout Description
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40956 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40959 \begin_layout Description
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40968 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40971 \begin_layout Description
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40980 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40988 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40991 \begin_layout Description
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40996 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40999 \begin_layout Description
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41011 \begin_layout Description
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_layout Description
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41032 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41035 \begin_layout Description
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_layout Description
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41056 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41062 \begin_inset Index idx
41065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 , when using this, set the document language to
41077 \begin_layout Description
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41083 \begin_inset space ~
41086 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41091 , when using this, set the document language to
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41100 \begin_layout Description
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41109 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41115 \begin_inset Index idx
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 -packages ! japanese
41125 , when using this, set the document language to
41130 \begin_layout Description
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41139 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41144 , when using this, set the document language to
41149 \begin_layout Description
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41158 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41163 , when using this, set the document language to
41168 \begin_layout Description
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41173 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41176 \begin_layout Description
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41189 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41192 \begin_layout Description
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41198 \begin_inset space ~
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41205 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41206 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41207 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41210 \begin_layout Description
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41222 \begin_layout Description
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41231 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41232 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41244 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41250 \begin_inset Index idx
41253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41263 \begin_layout Description
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41283 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41286 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41293 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41294 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41296 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41299 \begin_layout Description
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41314 \begin_inset Index idx
41317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41324 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41338 \begin_inset Index idx
41341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 -packages ! inputenc
41349 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41366 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_layout Description
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41386 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41387 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41388 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41392 \begin_layout Description
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41405 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41406 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41409 \begin_layout Section
41411 \begin_inset Index idx
41414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41421 \begin_inset Index idx
41424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 \begin_inset Index idx
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41435 Color ! Shaded boxes
41441 \begin_inset Index idx
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41453 \begin_layout Standard
41454 Here you can alter the font color for the
41458 (default: black), for
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41466 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41470 (default: white) and for
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41483 sets the color back to the default.
41486 \begin_layout Standard
41487 Clicking any button showing
41495 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41496 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41497 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41498 later more quickly.
41501 \begin_layout Standard
41502 Note, if you change the
41505 \begin_inset space ~
41510 font color and use the option
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41518 in the document settings under
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41526 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41533 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41540 \begin_layout Standard
41541 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41560 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41566 Code after a forced page break:
41569 \begin_layout Itemize
41570 For the page color:
41571 \begin_inset Newline newline
41578 pagecolor{color name}
41581 \begin_layout Itemize
41582 For the text color:
41583 \begin_inset Newline newline
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41594 You are restricted to one of
41630 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_inset Newline newline
41646 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41647 names to refer to them:
41650 \begin_layout Itemize
41656 \begin_inset Newline newline
41661 page_backgroundcolor
41664 \begin_layout Itemize
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset Newline newline
41682 \begin_layout Itemize
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset Newline newline
41700 \begin_layout Itemize
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41710 \begin_inset Newline newline
41718 \begin_layout Standard
41719 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41738 \begin_layout Section
41742 \begin_layout Standard
41743 Here you can adjust the
41747 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41751 as described in section
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41758 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41765 \begin_layout Section
41769 \begin_layout Standard
41770 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41776 \begin_inset Index idx
41779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41791 \begin_inset Index idx
41794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41796 -packages ! jurabib
41804 Sectioned bibliography
41806 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41812 \begin_inset Index idx
41815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 -packages ! bibtopic
41822 and you can select a
41826 for the generation of the bibliography.
41827 For a further description see section
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41834 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41841 \begin_layout Section
41845 \begin_layout Standard
41846 Here you can define the
41850 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41858 reference "sec:Index"
41865 \begin_layout Section
41869 \begin_layout Standard
41870 The PDF properties are explained in section
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41877 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41884 \begin_layout Section
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41890 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41896 \begin_inset Index idx
41899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41901 -packages ! amsmath
41911 \begin_inset Index idx
41914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41916 -packages ! amssymb
41926 \begin_inset Index idx
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41941 \begin_inset Index idx
41944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41956 \begin_inset Index idx
41959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 -packages ! mathdots
41971 \begin_inset Index idx
41974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 -packages ! mathtools
41986 \begin_inset Index idx
41989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42001 \begin_inset Index idx
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42006 -packages ! stackrel
42016 \begin_inset Index idx
42019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 -packages ! stmaryrd
42031 \begin_inset Index idx
42034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 -packages ! undertilde
42041 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42044 \begin_layout Description
42045 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42046 -errors in formulas,
42047 ensure that you have this enabled.
42050 \begin_layout Description
42051 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42052 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42053 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42057 \begin_layout Description
42058 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42073 \begin_layout Description
42074 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42077 \begin_inset space ~
42089 \begin_layout Description
42090 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42101 \begin_layout Description
42102 mathtools is used for the math commands
42138 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42145 \begin_layout Description
42146 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42148 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42157 \begin_layout Description
42158 stackrel is used for the math command
42175 \begin_layout Description
42176 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42179 \begin_layout Description
42180 undertilde is used for the math command
42188 Accents for one Character
42197 \begin_layout Section
42201 \begin_layout Standard
42202 The float placement options are described in the section
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42213 \begin_inset space ~
42221 \begin_layout Section
42225 \begin_layout Standard
42226 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42228 Program Code Listings
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42241 \begin_layout Section
42245 \begin_layout Standard
42246 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42254 set to be used and set the
42259 The itemize environment is described in section
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42266 reference "sec:Itemize"
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 You can furthermore specify a
42277 \begin_inset space ~
42282 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42283 command of the desired character.
42284 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42291 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42297 \begin_inset space \space{}
42301 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42311 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42312 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42315 \begin_layout Standard
42316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42324 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42325 -packages in the preamble (menu
42328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42329 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42338 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42342 usepackage{textcomp}
42345 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42349 usepackage{amssymb}
42359 \begin_layout Section
42363 \begin_layout Standard
42364 Branches are described in section
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42371 reference "sec:Branches"
42378 \begin_layout Section
42380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42382 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42389 \begin_layout Standard
42390 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42393 \begin_layout Description
42395 \begin_inset space ~
42399 \begin_inset space ~
42402 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42422 View Master Document
42423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42430 Update Master Document
42431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42438 menu or the toolbar.
42439 The default is set in
42441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42442 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42444 \begin_inset space ~
42447 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42451 \begin_inset space ~
42455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42457 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42464 \begin_layout Description
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42470 \begin_inset space ~
42473 Output settings for the menu
42475 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42483 For a detailed description see section
42485 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42498 \begin_layout Description
42500 \begin_inset space ~
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42507 Options offers settings for the export format
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42520 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42524 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42533 settings are described in detail in section
42535 Math Output in XHTML
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42558 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42561 \begin_layout Section
42569 \begin_layout Standard
42570 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42572 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42574 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42576 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42582 -syntax is given in section
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42589 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42596 \begin_layout Chapter
42602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42604 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42609 \begin_inset Index idx
42612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42622 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42628 It has the following submenus.
42631 \begin_layout Section
42635 \begin_layout Subsection
42639 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42640 User Interface File
42641 \begin_inset Index idx
42644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 Customization ! of toolbars
42651 \begin_inset Index idx
42654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42655 Customization ! of menus
42663 \begin_layout Standard
42664 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42665 interface (ui) file.
42666 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42674 \begin_layout Description
42679 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42682 \begin_layout Description
42689 the menu entries in popup context menus
42692 \begin_layout Description
42697 specifies the toolbar buttons
42700 \begin_layout Standard
42701 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42702 and edit the entries.
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42706 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42718 entries must be finished with an explicit
42743 and in the case of the
42744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42756 The syntax for the entries is:
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42760 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42791 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42794 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42795 -functions are listed in the menu
42797 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42799 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42808 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 For example, assuming you use the menu
42817 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42820 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42824 \begin_layout Standard
42825 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42849 \begin_layout Standard
42851 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42866 to have the sixth bookmark.
42869 \begin_layout Standard
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42878 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42879 's toolbar buttons.
42880 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42881 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42884 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42895 \begin_layout Standard
42898 Enable tool tips in main work area
42900 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42908 \begin_layout Standard
42913 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42914 should display in the menu
42916 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_layout Subsection
42930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42934 \begin_layout Standard
42937 Restore window layouts and geometries
42940 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42941 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42948 Restore cursor positions
42950 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42954 \begin_layout Standard
42957 Load opened files from last session
42959 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42963 \begin_layout Standard
42966 Clear all session information
42968 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42969 sessions (cursor positions, names
42970 of last opened documents, etc.).
42973 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42977 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42982 \begin_inset Index idx
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42994 \begin_layout Standard
42997 Backup original documents when saving
42999 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43000 it was saved the last time.
43001 It is stored in the
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "sec:Paths"
43020 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43029 The backup file has the file extension
43030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43047 Backup documents, every
43049 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43052 \begin_layout Standard
43055 Save documents compressed by default
43057 always saves files in a compressed format.
43060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43061 Windows & work area
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43067 Open documents in tabs
43069 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43078 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43091 reference "sec:Paths"
43095 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43102 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43103 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43104 of \SpecialChar LyX
43106 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43107 instance is created for each file.
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43113 Single close-tab button
43115 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43118 \begin_inset Graphics
43119 filename ../images/closetab.png
43126 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43127 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43139 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43140 before the change takes effect.
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43153 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43155 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43157 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43161 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43162 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43163 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43166 \begin_layout Subsection
43168 \begin_inset Index idx
43171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43180 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43193 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 This section only deals with the fonts
43205 the \SpecialChar LyX
43207 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43222 \begin_layout Standard
43223 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43240 (depends on the system) as its
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43260 You can change the font size with the
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43272 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43277 points have the size of 1
43278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43288 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43293 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43298 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43299 \begin_inset space ~
43303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43305 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43312 \begin_layout Standard
43315 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43317 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43318 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43319 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43320 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43321 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43323 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43324 \begin_inset space ~
43330 \begin_layout Subsection
43332 \begin_inset Index idx
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43336 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43343 \begin_inset Index idx
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43356 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43357 by choosing an item in the
43358 list and selecting the
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43366 By checking the option
43370 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43373 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_inset space ~
43383 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43386 \begin_layout Subsection
43388 \begin_inset Index idx
43391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43400 \begin_layout Standard
43401 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43405 \begin_layout Standard
43410 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43411 This feature is described in section
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43418 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43425 \begin_layout Standard
43426 Checking the option
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43442 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43445 \begin_layout Section
43447 \begin_inset Index idx
43450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43459 \begin_layout Subsection
43463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43467 \begin_layout Standard
43470 Cursor follows scrollbar
43472 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43476 \begin_layout Standard
43477 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43478 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43479 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43485 Scroll below end of document
43487 is self-explanatory.
43490 \begin_layout Standard
43491 In \SpecialChar LyX
43492 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43499 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43501 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43502 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43505 \begin_layout Standard
43508 Sort environments alphabetically
43510 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43513 \begin_layout Standard
43516 Group environments by their category
43518 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43526 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43541 \begin_layout Standard
43542 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43547 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43548 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43552 \begin_layout Subsection
43554 \begin_inset Index idx
43557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43564 \begin_inset Index idx
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43568 Settings ! Shortcuts
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43581 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43583 Several binding files are available, among them:
43586 \begin_layout Description
43587 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43590 \begin_layout Description
43591 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43603 \begin_layout Description
43604 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43616 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43621 , and binding files for special languages.
43622 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43627 \begin_inset space \space{}
43631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43639 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43640 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43641 will try to use the appropriate binding
43645 \begin_layout Standard
43646 Some binding files, like
43650 , only have a limited scope.
43651 When looking at the end of the file
43655 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43671 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43672 in the selected key binding file.
43675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43679 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43684 \begin_inset Index idx
43687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 Key Bindings ! Editing
43696 \begin_layout Standard
43697 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43698 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43699 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43700 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43703 Show key-bindings containing
43706 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43707 Insert there for example as keyword
43708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43715 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43716 functions that contain
43717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43725 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43726 All \SpecialChar LyX
43727 functions are also listed in the file
43732 that you will find in the
43739 \begin_layout Standard
43740 For example, to add the shortcut
43748 , select the function and press the
43753 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43754 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43757 \begin_layout Standard
43758 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43759 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43761 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43762 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43764 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43770 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43773 \begin_layout Standard
43774 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43776 The syntax of the entries is:
43779 \begin_layout Standard
43785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43804 \begin_layout Subsection
43806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43808 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43813 \begin_inset Index idx
43816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 \begin_inset Index idx
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43835 \begin_layout Standard
43836 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43837 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43838 provides keyboard maps.
43839 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43840 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43852 and select the keyboard map file named
43859 \begin_layout Standard
43868 keyboard map and, if you use the
43872 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43875 arg "keymap-primary"
43881 arg "keymap-secondary"
43884 respectively or toggle between them with
43887 arg "keymap-toggle"
43893 \begin_layout Standard
43894 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43902 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43911 \begin_layout Standard
43912 You can also specify the mouse
43914 Wheel scrolling speed
43917 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43921 \begin_layout Standard
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43938 you can select a key for zooming.
43939 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43942 \begin_layout Subsection
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43947 Input completion is described in section
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43954 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43961 \begin_layout Section
43963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43970 \begin_inset Index idx
43973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43980 \begin_inset Index idx
43983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 \begin_layout Standard
43993 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43994 are normally determined during
43996 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43999 \begin_layout Description
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44004 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44005 's working directory.
44006 It is the default when you
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44025 \begin_layout Description
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44030 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44032 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44046 \begin_layout Description
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44051 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44057 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44061 \begin_inset Newline newline
44065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44077 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44078 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44086 \begin_layout Description
44088 \begin_inset space ~
44092 \begin_inset Index idx
44095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44101 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44102 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44109 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44117 will be used to save the backups.
44118 \begin_inset Newline newline
44121 Backup files have the ending
44122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44132 \begin_layout Description
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44137 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44138 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44140 \begin_inset Newline newline
44147 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44153 You can edit this file with the program
44162 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44163 in its preferences under
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44172 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44177 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44179 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44180 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44186 and \SpecialChar LyX
44187 need to be running the same time.
44188 \begin_inset Newline newline
44191 The pipe is also used for the
44196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44202 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44207 \begin_inset Newline newline
44210 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44211 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44212 \begin_inset Newline newline
44228 \begin_layout Description
44230 \begin_inset space ~
44233 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44236 \begin_layout Description
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44241 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44242 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44243 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44246 \begin_layout Description
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44251 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44257 You only need to specify it if you are using
44261 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44263 For \SpecialChar LyX
44268 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44272 \begin_layout Description
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44277 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44278 When \SpecialChar LyX
44279 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44280 to find it on the system.
44281 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44283 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44292 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44293 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44296 \begin_layout Description
44298 \begin_inset space ~
44301 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44302 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44303 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44304 code or in the document
44306 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44308 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44309 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44310 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44311 scanned for the input files.
44312 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44313 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44315 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44316 compilation may fail for some documents.
44319 \begin_layout Section
44323 \begin_layout Standard
44324 Here you can insert your
44333 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44335 \begin_inset space ~
44339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44341 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44345 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44348 \begin_layout Section
44350 \begin_inset Index idx
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 Language ! Settings
44360 \begin_inset Index idx
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 Settings ! Language
44372 \begin_layout Subsection
44374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44376 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44383 \begin_layout Description
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44392 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44394 You can find its actual translation status here:
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44397 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44404 \begin_layout Description
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44409 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44410 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44411 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44412 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44429 The most widespread language package is
44434 \begin_inset Index idx
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44444 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44446 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44447 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44448 come with the alternative
44454 \begin_inset Index idx
44457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44459 -packages ! polyglossia
44464 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44465 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44471 The available selections are described in section
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44478 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44485 \begin_layout Description
44487 \begin_inset space ~
44490 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44491 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44492 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44493 An example is the start command
44499 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44501 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44505 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44520 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44525 \begin_layout Description
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44535 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44536 command toggles the package on and off.
44539 \begin_layout Description
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44548 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44552 \begin_layout Description
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44561 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44565 \begin_layout Description
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44574 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44575 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44576 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44578 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44585 \begin_layout Description
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44590 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44592 When this option is not set, the
44595 \begin_inset space ~
44600 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44602 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44605 \begin_inset space ~
44613 \begin_layout Description
44615 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_inset space ~
44627 When it is not set, the
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44635 is set to the end of the document.
44638 \begin_layout Description
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44647 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44648 language will be underlined in blue.
44651 \begin_layout Description
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44657 \begin_inset space ~
44660 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44661 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44664 \begin_layout Description
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44669 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44670 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44671 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44672 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44675 \begin_layout Subsection
44679 \begin_layout Standard
44680 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44687 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44694 \begin_layout Section
44698 \begin_layout Subsection
44702 \begin_layout Description
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44711 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44715 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44723 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44732 \begin_inset Index idx
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44746 Settings ! Date format
44751 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44752 \begin_inset Newline newline
44756 \begin_inset Flex URL
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44761 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44767 \begin_inset Newline newline
44770 For example the format
44771 \begin_inset Newline newline
44775 \begin_inset Newline newline
44778 prints the date as day/month/year.
44781 \begin_layout Description
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44787 \begin_inset space ~
44790 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44791 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44794 \begin_layout Description
44796 \begin_inset space ~
44799 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44801 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44803 \begin_inset space ~
44809 For a detailed description see section
44811 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44816 \begin_inset space ~
44824 \begin_layout Subsection
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44832 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44850 \begin_layout Description
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44867 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44872 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44893 are used for Cyrillic.
44894 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44907 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44909 sets up in the background.
44910 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44913 \begin_layout Description
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44919 \begin_inset space ~
44922 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44927 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44931 \begin_layout Description
44933 \begin_inset space ~
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44945 \begin_inset space ~
44948 options They only have an effect when the program
44952 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44955 \begin_layout Standard
44956 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44957 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44958 manuals of the applications.
44961 \begin_layout Description
44963 \begin_inset space ~
44966 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44973 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44980 \begin_layout Description
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44985 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44992 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
44999 \begin_layout Description
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45004 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45011 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45018 \begin_layout Description
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45027 command Command for the program
45029 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45032 that is described in the section
45034 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45039 Additional Features
45044 \begin_layout Standard
45045 There are additionally the following options:
45048 \begin_layout Description
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45054 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45062 \begin_inset space ~
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45070 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45088 to separate folders.
45089 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45091 \begin_inset Index idx
45094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 \begin_inset Index idx
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 \begin_layout Description
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45119 \begin_inset space ~
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45138 changes Removes all manually set
45144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45152 dialog when changing the document class.
45155 \begin_layout Section
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset Index idx
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 \begin_layout Subsection
45175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45177 name "subsec:Converters"
45182 \begin_inset Index idx
45185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45194 \begin_layout Standard
45195 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45196 from one format to another.
45197 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45198 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45205 \begin_inset space ~
45210 field and press the
45215 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45224 drop-down list, modify the
45228 field and press the
45235 \begin_layout Standard
45238 Converter File Cache
45244 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45246 Maximum Age (in days
45249 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45250 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45253 \begin_layout Standard
45254 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45255 definition, is described in the section
45266 \begin_layout Subsection
45268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45270 name "sec:File-Formats"
45275 \begin_inset Index idx
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45285 \begin_inset Index idx
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45297 \begin_layout Standard
45298 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45308 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45311 \begin_layout Standard
45312 You can also define the
45314 Default output format
45316 that is used when you use
45318 View, Update, View Master Document
45322 Update Master Document
45328 menu or the toolbar.
45331 \begin_layout Standard
45332 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45343 \begin_layout Standard
45344 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45346 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45347 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45348 This is done by specifying a
45353 More about this is described in the section
45364 \begin_layout Chapter
45365 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45367 \begin_inset Index idx
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45379 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45386 \begin_layout Standard
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45394 reference "tab:Units"
45398 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45399 and used in this documentation.
45402 \begin_layout Standard
45403 \begin_inset Float table
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45410 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45436 \begin_inset Tabular
45437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45438 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45439 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45440 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 scaled point (65536
45592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45652 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45707 % of original image width
45714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45921 \begin_layout Chapter
45923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45925 name "chap:Credits"
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45934 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45937 \begin_layout Itemize
45940 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45943 \begin_layout Itemize
45949 \begin_layout Itemize
45955 \begin_layout Itemize
45961 \begin_layout Itemize
45967 \begin_layout Itemize
45973 \begin_layout Itemize
45979 \begin_layout Itemize
45985 \begin_layout Itemize
45988 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45991 \begin_layout Itemize
45997 \begin_layout Itemize
46003 \begin_layout Itemize
46009 \begin_layout Itemize
46015 \begin_layout Itemize
46021 \begin_layout Itemize
46027 \begin_layout Itemize
46033 \begin_layout Itemize
46039 \begin_layout Itemize
46040 The \SpecialChar LyX
46042 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46051 \begin_layout Standard
46052 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46055 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46062 \begin_layout Bibliography
46063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46064 LatexCommand bibitem
46070 The \SpecialChar LyX
46072 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46075 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46080 \begin_inset Newline newline
46084 \begin_inset Flex URL
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46097 \begin_layout Bibliography
46098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46099 LatexCommand bibitem
46100 key "latexcompanion"
46104 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46106 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46107 Companion Second Edition.
46110 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46113 \begin_layout Bibliography
46114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46115 LatexCommand bibitem
46120 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46123 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46127 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46130 \begin_layout Bibliography
46131 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46132 LatexCommand bibitem
46140 : A Document Preparation System.
46143 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46146 \begin_layout Bibliography
46147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46148 LatexCommand bibitem
46157 The \SpecialChar TeX
46161 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46164 \begin_layout Bibliography
46165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46166 LatexCommand bibitem
46171 The \SpecialChar TeX
46173 \begin_inset Newline newline
46177 \begin_inset Flex URL
46180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46182 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46190 \begin_layout Bibliography
46191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46192 LatexCommand bibitem
46197 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46199 \begin_inset Newline newline
46203 \begin_inset Flex URL
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46208 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46216 \begin_layout Bibliography
46217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46218 LatexCommand bibitem
46224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46226 name "Documentation"
46227 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46233 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46237 \begin_inset Newline newline
46241 \begin_inset Flex URL
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46254 \begin_layout Bibliography
46255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46256 LatexCommand bibitem
46262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46264 name "Documentation"
46265 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46269 how to use the program
46271 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46275 \begin_inset Newline newline
46279 \begin_inset Flex URL
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46292 \begin_layout Bibliography
46293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46294 LatexCommand bibitem
46300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46302 name "Documentation"
46303 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46312 \begin_inset Newline newline
46316 \begin_inset Flex URL
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46321 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46329 \begin_layout Bibliography
46330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46331 LatexCommand bibitem
46337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46339 name "Documentation"
46340 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46349 \begin_inset Newline newline
46353 \begin_inset Flex URL
46356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46366 \begin_layout Bibliography
46367 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46368 LatexCommand bibitem
46374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46376 name "Documentation"
46377 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46381 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46383 \begin_inset Newline newline
46387 \begin_inset Flex URL
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46400 \begin_layout Bibliography
46401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46402 LatexCommand bibitem
46408 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46410 name "Documentation"
46411 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46415 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46421 \begin_inset Index idx
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 -packages ! caption
46432 \begin_inset Newline newline
46436 \begin_inset Flex URL
46439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46441 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46449 \begin_layout Bibliography
46450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46451 LatexCommand bibitem
46457 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46459 name "Documentation"
46460 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46464 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46470 \begin_inset Index idx
46473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 -packages ! enumitem
46481 \begin_inset Newline newline
46485 \begin_inset Flex URL
46488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46490 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46498 \begin_layout Bibliography
46499 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46500 LatexCommand bibitem
46506 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46508 name "Documentation"
46509 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46513 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46519 \begin_inset Index idx
46522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46524 -packages ! fancyhdr
46530 \begin_inset Newline newline
46534 \begin_inset Flex URL
46537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46539 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46547 \begin_layout Bibliography
46548 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46549 LatexCommand bibitem
46555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46557 name "Documentation"
46558 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46562 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46568 \begin_inset Index idx
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 -packages ! hyperref
46579 \begin_inset Newline newline
46583 \begin_inset Flex URL
46586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46588 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46596 \begin_layout Bibliography
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46598 LatexCommand bibitem
46604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46606 name "Documentation"
46607 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46611 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46617 \begin_inset Index idx
46620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 -packages ! nomencl
46628 \begin_inset Newline newline
46632 \begin_inset Flex URL
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46645 \begin_layout Bibliography
46646 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46647 LatexCommand bibitem
46653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46655 name "Documentation"
46656 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46660 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46666 \begin_inset Index idx
46669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46671 -packages ! prettyref
46677 \begin_inset Newline newline
46681 \begin_inset Flex URL
46684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46686 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46694 \begin_layout Bibliography
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46696 LatexCommand bibitem
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46704 name "Documentation"
46705 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46709 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46715 \begin_inset Index idx
46718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46720 -packages ! refstyle
46726 \begin_inset Newline newline
46730 \begin_inset Flex URL
46733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46735 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46743 \begin_layout Bibliography
46744 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46745 LatexCommand bibitem
46751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46754 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46758 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46760 \begin_inset Newline newline
46764 \begin_inset Flex URL
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46777 \begin_layout Bibliography
46778 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46779 LatexCommand bibitem
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46788 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46792 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46794 \begin_inset Newline newline
46798 \begin_inset Flex URL
46801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46803 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46811 \begin_layout Bibliography
46812 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46813 LatexCommand bibitem
46819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46822 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46826 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46827 for Cyrillic languages:
46828 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_inset Flex URL
46835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46845 \begin_layout Bibliography
46846 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46847 LatexCommand bibitem
46853 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46856 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46860 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46862 \begin_inset Newline newline
46866 \begin_inset Flex URL
46869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46871 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46879 \begin_layout Bibliography
46880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46881 LatexCommand bibitem
46887 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46890 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46894 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46896 \begin_inset Newline newline
46900 \begin_inset Flex URL
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46913 \begin_layout Bibliography
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46915 LatexCommand bibitem
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46924 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46928 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46930 \begin_inset Newline newline
46934 \begin_inset Flex URL
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46939 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46947 \begin_layout Bibliography
46948 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46949 LatexCommand bibitem
46955 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46958 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46962 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46964 \begin_inset Newline newline
46968 \begin_inset Flex URL
46971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46981 \begin_layout Bibliography
46982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46983 LatexCommand bibitem
46989 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46992 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46996 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46998 \begin_inset Newline newline
47002 \begin_inset Flex URL
47005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47007 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47015 \begin_layout Bibliography
47016 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47017 LatexCommand bibitem
47023 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47026 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47030 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47032 \begin_inset Newline newline
47036 \begin_inset Flex URL
47039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47049 \begin_layout Bibliography
47050 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47051 LatexCommand bibitem
47057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47060 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47064 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47066 \begin_inset Newline newline
47070 \begin_inset Flex URL
47073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47075 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47083 \begin_layout Bibliography
47084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47085 LatexCommand bibitem
47091 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47094 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47098 about new features in
47104 \begin_inset Newline newline
47108 \begin_inset Flex URL
47111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47113 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47121 \begin_layout Standard
47122 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47156 \begin_inset Note Note
47159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47166 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47167 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47168 bibliography is the second one:
47176 \begin_layout Standard
47177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47178 LatexCommand bibtex
47179 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47180 options "biblio/alphadin"
47187 \begin_layout Standard
47188 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47192 \begin_layout Standard
47193 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47194 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47200 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47201 LatexCommand printindex